ๅฐŠๆ•ฌ็š„ ๅพฎไฟกๆฑ‡็Ž‡๏ผš1ๅ†† โ‰ˆ 0.046239 ๅ…ƒ ๆ”ฏไป˜ๅฎๆฑ‡็Ž‡๏ผš1ๅ†† โ‰ˆ 0.04633ๅ…ƒ [้€€ๅ‡บ็™ปๅฝ•]
SlideShare a Scribd company logo
2011
REINFORCED CONCRETE
DESIGN FOR CIVIL ENGINEERS
& CONSTRUCTION MANAGERS
2
STRUCTURAL DESIGN
Aim of Design
BS 8110 states that the aim of design is: To come up with a structure which is cost effective but
will, at the same time, perform satisfactorily throughout its intended life; that is the structure
will, with an appropriate degree of safety, be able to sustain all the loads and deformation of
normal construction and use and that it will have adequate durability and resistance to the
effects of fire and misuse.
REINFORCED CONCRETE
Reinforced concrete is a composite material of steel bars embedded in a hardened concrete
matrix.
Reinforced concrete is a strong durable building material that can be formed into many varied
shapes and sizes. Its utility and versatility is achieved by combining the best properties of steel
and concrete.
Concrete Steel
Strength in tension Poor Good
Strength in
compression
Good Good but slender bars will
buckle
Strength in shear Fair Good
Durability Good Corrodes if unprotected
Fire resistance Good Poor โ€“ loses its strength rapidly
at high temperatures
Steel and concrete, as is seen in the table above are complementary to each other. When
combined, steel will provide the mix with tensile strength and some shear strength while
concrete will provide compressive strength, durability as well as good fire resistance.
Composite Action
The tensile strength of concrete is only 10% its compressive strength. In design, therefore, it is
assumed that concrete does not resist any tensile forces;it is the reinforcement that carries
these tensile forces and these are transferred by bond between the interface of the two
materials. If the bond is not adequate, the reinforcement will slip and there would be no
composite action.
It is assumed that in a composite section there is perfect bond such that the strain in the
reinforcement is identical to the strain in the concrete surrounding it.
3
๏‚ท Concrete
Concrete is composed of
๏‚ท Cement
๏‚ท Fine aggregate
๏‚ท Coarse aggregate
๏‚ท Water
๏‚ท Additives (optional)
Concrete stress-strain relations
A typical stress strain curve for concrete is as shown above. As the load is applied, the ratio
of stress and stain are at first linear (up to 1/3 of the ultimate compressive strength) i.e.,
concrete behaves like an elastic material with full recovery of displacement if load is
removed.The curve eventually becomes not linear because at this range concrete behaves
like a plastic. If the load is removed from concrete at this stage, there wonโ€™t be full recovery
of the material. A little deformation will also remain.
The ultimate strain for concrete is 0.0035.
4
๏‚ท Steel
Stress strain Relationship
There are two types of steel bars:
๏‚ท Mild steel
๏‚ท High yield steel
Mild steel behaves like an elastic material up the yield point where any further increase in
strain will not increase the stress. Beyond the yield point, steel becomes plastic and the
strain increases rapidly to the ultimate value.
High yield steel on the other hand shows a more gradual change from the elastic stage to
the plastic stage
Flexural Failure
This may happen in due to:
a) Under-reinforcement โ€“tension failure
b) Over-reinforcement โ€“ compression failure
Tension Failure
If the steel content of the section is small (an under-reinforced concrete section), the steel
will reach its yield strength before the concrete reaches its maximum capacity. The flexural
strength of the section is reached when the strain in the extreme compression fiber of the
concrete is approximately 0.003, Fig. 1.10. With further increase in strain, the moment of
resistance reduces, and the bottom of the member will fail by lagging and cracking. This
type of failure, because it is initiated by yielding of the tension steel, could be referred to as
"tension failure." The section then fails in a "ductile" fashion with adequate visible warning
before failure.
5
FIGURE 1.10. Single reinforced section when the tension failure is reached.
Compression Failure
If the steel content of the section is large (an over-reinforced concrete section), the concrete
may reach its maximum capacity before the steel yields. Again the flexural strength of the
section is reached when the strain in the extreme compression fiber of the concrete is
approximately 0.003, Fig. 1.11. The section then fails suddenly in a "brittle" fashion by crushing
of the compression part if the concrete is not confined.There may be little visible warning of
failure.
FIGURE 1.11. Single reinforced section when the compression failure is reached.
These two behaviors show the importance of ensuring that the right amount of reinforcement
is provided in order to ensure that failure of one steel or concrete does not start before the
other. Failure of both steel and concrete should occur at the same time. This is known as
balanced failure.
6
Balanced Failure
At a particular steel content, the steel reaches the yield strength and the concrete reaches its
extreme fiber compression strain of 0.003, simultaneously, Fig. 1.12.
FIGURE 1.12. Single reinforced section when the balanced failure is reached.
FIGURE 1.13. Strain profiles at the flexural strength of a section.
7
DESIGN METHODS
Design of an engineering structure must ensure that
1. The structure remains safe under the worst loading condition
2. During normal working conditions the deformation of the members does not detract
from the appearance, durability or performance of the structure
Methods of design that have so far been formulated are:
1. Permissible stress method โ€“ ultimate strengths of the materials are divided by a factor
of safety to provide design stresses which are usually within the elastic range
Shortcomings โ€“ because it is based on elastic stress distribution, it is not
applicable to concrete since it is semi โ€“ plastic
โ€“ it is unsafe when dealing with stability of structures subject to
overturning forces
2. The load factor methodโ€“where working loads are multiplied by a factor of safety
Shortcomings โ€“ it cannot directly account for variability of materials due to
material stresses
It cannot be used to calculate the deflections and cracking at working conditions.
3. Limit state methodโ€“multiplies the working loads by partial factors of safety factors and
also divides the materialsโ€™ ultimate strengths by further partial factors of safety. It
overcomes the limitations of the previous methods by use of factors of safety as well as
materialsโ€™ factors of safety making it possible to vary them so that they may be used in
the plastic range for ultimate state or in the elastic range under working loads.
Limit States
The criterion for safe design is that the structure should not become unfit for use. i.e. it should
not reach a limit state during its design life.
Types of limit states
๏‚ท Ultimate limit state
๏‚ท Serviceability limit state
a) Ultimate limit state
This requires that the structure be able to withstand the forces for which it has been
designed
b) Serviceability limit state
Most important SLS are
i) Deflection
ii) Cracking
8
Others are
i) Durability
ii) Excessive vibration
iii) Fatigue
iv) Fire resistance
v) Special circumstances
Characteristic Material Strengths
Characteristic strength is taken as the value below which it is unlikely that more than 5% of the
results will fall. This is given by
๐‘“๐‘˜ = ๐‘“
๐‘š โˆ’ 1.64๐‘ 
Where ๐‘“๐‘˜ = ๐‘โ„Ž๐‘Ž๐‘Ÿ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘–๐‘ ๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘ ๐‘ ๐‘ก๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘›๐‘”๐‘กโ„Ž, ๐‘“
๐‘š = ๐‘š๐‘’๐‘Ž๐‘› ๐‘ ๐‘ก๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘›๐‘”๐‘กโ„Ž, ๐‘  = ๐‘ ๐‘ก๐‘Ž๐‘›๐‘‘๐‘Ž๐‘Ÿ๐‘‘ ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘ฃ๐‘–๐‘Ž๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘œ๐‘›
Characteristic Loads
Characteristic loads (service loads) are the actual loads that the structure is designed to carry.
It should be possible to assess loads statistically
๐‘โ„Ž๐‘Ž๐‘Ÿ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘–๐‘ ๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘ ๐‘™๐‘œ๐‘Ž๐‘‘ = ๐‘š๐‘’๐‘Ž๐‘› ๐‘™๐‘œ๐‘Ž๐‘‘ ยฑ 1.64 ๐‘ ๐‘ก๐‘Ž๐‘›๐‘‘๐‘Ž๐‘Ÿ๐‘‘ ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘ฃ๐‘–๐‘Ž๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘œ๐‘›
Partial Factors of Safety for Materials
๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘–๐‘”๐‘› ๐‘ ๐‘ก๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘›๐‘”๐‘กโ„Ž =
๐‘โ„Ž๐‘Ž๐‘Ÿ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘–๐‘ ๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘ ๐‘ ๐‘ก๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘›๐‘”๐‘กโ„Ž (๐‘“๐‘˜)
๐‘๐‘Ž๐‘Ÿ๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘Ž๐‘™ ๐‘“๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก๐‘œ๐‘Ÿ ๐‘œ๐‘“ ๐‘ ๐‘Ž๐‘“๐‘’๐‘ก๐‘ฆ (๐›พ๐‘š)
Factors considered when selecting a suitable value for ๐›พ๐‘š
๏‚ท The strength of the material in an actual member
๏‚ท The severity of the limit state being considered.
Partial Factors of Safety for Loads (๐œธ๐’‡)
๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘–๐‘”๐‘› ๐‘™๐‘œ๐‘Ž๐‘‘ = ๐‘โ„Ž๐‘Ž๐‘Ÿ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘–๐‘ ๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘ ๐‘™๐‘œ๐‘Ž๐‘‘ ร— ๐‘๐‘Ž๐‘Ÿ๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘Ž๐‘™ ๐‘“๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก๐‘œ๐‘Ÿ ๐‘œ๐‘“ ๐‘ ๐‘Ž๐‘“๐‘’๐‘ก๐‘ฆ (๐›พ๐‘“)
Structural Elements in Reinforced Concrete
They are the following (in the order of their listing i.e. top to bottom)
๏‚ท Roof
๏‚ท Beams โ€“ horizontal members carrying lateral loads
๏‚ท Slab โ€“ horizontal panel plate elements carrying lateral loads
9
๏‚ท Column โ€“ vertical members carrying primarily axial load but generally subjected to axial
load and moment
๏‚ท Walls โ€“ vertical plate elements resisting lateral or in-plane loads
๏‚ท Bases and Foundations โ€“ pads or strips supported directly on the ground that spread the
loads from the columns or walls so that they can be supported by the ground without
excessive settlement
The process of Reinforced Concrete Design
1. Receive Architectural Drawings
2. Establish the use of the structure and use BS 6399 to establish live load
3. Establish / determine the support structure and the respective structural elements
4. Design starts from top to bottom
Key observations in Reinforced Concrete Design
The following are the fundamentals to be observed before design is effected:
๏‚ท Effective support system
๏‚ท Critical spans
๏‚ท Loading โ€“ ensure all dead loads and live loads are loaded on the respective elements
๏‚ท Deflection
SLABS
Slabs are reinforced concrete plate elements forming floors and roofs in buildings which
normally carry uniformly distributed loads. They are primarily flexural members
Types of Slabs
๏‚ท One way spanning slab
๏‚ท Two way spanning slab
๏‚ท Ribbed slab
๏‚ท Flat slab
Types of support
๏‚ท Fixed
๏‚ท Simply supported
10
GENERAL SLAB DESIGN PROCEDURE
Slab Sizing
Slab sizing majorly depends on the support conditions (cantilever, simply supported,
continuous)
For continuous,
๐‘กโ„Ž๐‘–๐‘๐‘˜๐‘›๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘  ๐‘œ๐‘“ ๐‘ ๐‘™๐‘Ž๐‘ =
๐‘™๐‘ฅ
36
+ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘›๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ก๐‘’ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘ฃ๐‘’๐‘Ÿ + ๐›ท
2
โ„
For simply supported,
๐‘กโ„Ž๐‘–๐‘๐‘˜๐‘›๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘  ๐‘œ๐‘“ ๐‘ ๐‘™๐‘Ž๐‘ =
๐‘™๐‘ฅ
26
+ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘›๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ก๐‘’ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘ฃ๐‘’๐‘Ÿ + ๐›ท
2
โ„
For cantilever,
๐‘กโ„Ž๐‘–๐‘๐‘˜๐‘›๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘  ๐‘œ๐‘“ ๐‘ ๐‘™๐‘Ž๐‘ =
๐‘™๐‘ฅ
10
+ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘›๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ก๐‘’ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘ฃ๐‘’๐‘Ÿ + ๐›ท
2
โ„
The table below is a summary of can be used
Slab type Initial sizing Deflection Check
Simply Supported 36 26
Continuous 26 20
Cantilever 10 7
The most suitable concrete cover depends on exposure conditions (table 3.3 of BS 8110) as well
as the aggregate size. The minimum concrete thickness should be โ„Ž๐‘Ž๐‘”๐‘” + 5๐‘š๐‘š
Loading
The following loads may be used in design:
๏‚ท Characteristic dead load ๐บ๐‘˜ i.e. the weight of the structure complete with finishes,
fixtures and partitions
๏‚ท Characteristic imposed load ๐‘„๐‘˜
The design load is calculated by multiplying the dead and live loads with appropriate partial
factors of safety (table 2.1).
๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘–๐‘”๐‘› ๐‘™๐‘œ๐‘Ž๐‘‘ (๐‘›) = ๐›พ๐‘“๐บ๐‘˜ + ๐›พ๐‘“๐‘„๐‘˜
In most cases the ๐›พ๐‘“ for dead load is 1.4 while ๐›พ๐‘“ for live load is 1.6. However, this is subject to
confirmation from the table 2.1 of BS8110.
๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘–๐‘”๐‘› ๐‘™๐‘œ๐‘Ž๐‘‘ (๐‘›) = 1.4๐บ๐‘˜ + 1.6๐‘„๐‘˜
11
Spanning Mode and analysis
This can be calculated by finding the ratio between the longer side to the shorter one of the
span i.e.
๐‘™๐‘ฆ
๐‘™๐‘ฅ
. If this ratio is less than 2.0, then this implies that the load is spanning in both
directions. If the ratio is greater than 2.0, then the slab is one way spanning. For two-way
spanning slabs, the value of
๐‘™๐‘ฆ
๐‘™๐‘ฅ
are used to determine coefficients used to calculate moments
according to BS 8110 tables 3.13, 3.14 and 3.15.
For simply supported (Table 3.13)
๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฅ = ๐›ผ๐‘ ๐‘ฅ๐‘›๐‘™๐‘ฅ
2
๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฆ = ๐›ผ๐‘ ๐‘ฆ๐‘›๐‘™๐‘ฅ
2
For restrained slab (Table 3.14)
๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฅ = ๐›ฝ๐‘ ๐‘ฅ๐‘›๐‘™๐‘ฅ
2
๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฆ = ๐›ฝ๐‘ ๐‘ฆ๐‘›๐‘™๐‘ฅ
2
Bending
๐พ =
๐‘€
๐‘๐‘‘2๐‘“
๐‘๐‘ข
๐พ < 0.156
Note: For continuous slabs b is assumed to be 1m width of slab at the spans. However, at the
supports, b is
๐‘ = 0.15๐‘™
๐‘‘ = ๐‘กโ„Ž๐‘–๐‘๐‘˜๐‘›๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘  ๐‘œ๐‘“ ๐‘ ๐‘™๐‘Ž๐‘(โ„Ž) โˆ’ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘›๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ก๐‘’ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘ฃ๐‘’๐‘Ÿ โˆ’
๐‘‘๐‘–๐‘Ž๐‘š๐‘’๐‘ก๐‘’๐‘Ÿ ๐‘œ๐‘“ ๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘–๐‘›๐‘“๐‘œ๐‘Ÿ๐‘๐‘’๐‘š๐‘’๐‘›๐‘ก
2
If ๐พ > 0.156, compression steel is required
๐‘ง = ๐‘‘ (0.5 + โˆš0.25 โˆ’
๐พ
0.9
)
๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก =
๐‘€
0.87๐‘“
๐‘ฆ๐‘ง
๐‘š๐‘–๐‘› ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = 0.13%๐‘โ„Ž
The main steel will be in the direction of the span and the distribution steel will be in the
transverse direction. ๐‘š๐‘–๐‘› ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก can also be used to obtain the reinforcement for the distribution
steel.
12
Shear in Slabs
Design shear stress at any cross section
๐œˆ =
๐‘‰
๐‘๐‘‘
๐œˆ should be less than 0.8โˆš๐‘“๐‘๐‘ข
Concrete shear stress
100๐ด๐‘ 
๐‘๐‘‘
Therefore, the concrete shear stress ๐œˆ๐‘ will be obtained from table 3.8. If ๐œˆ > ๐œˆ๐‘, shear
reinforcement is required. if ๐œˆ < ๐œˆ๐‘ shear reinforcement is not required.
If ๐œˆ๐‘ < ๐œˆ < (๐œˆ๐‘ + 0.4), area of reinforcement will be ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ฃ โ‰ฅ 0.4๐‘๐‘ ๐‘ฃ 0.95๐‘“
๐‘ฆ๐‘ฃ
โ„
If (๐œˆ + 0.4) < ๐œˆ < 0.8โˆš๐‘“๐‘๐‘ข area of reinforcement will be ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ฃ โ‰ฅ ๐‘๐‘ ๐‘ฃ(๐œˆ โˆ’ ๐œˆ๐‘) 0.95๐‘“
๐‘ฆ๐‘ฃ
โ„
In most cases however, shear reinforcement of slabs is not required.
Deflection
Service stress (BS 8110, Table 3.10)
๐‘“
๐‘  =
2๐‘“
๐‘ฆ๐ด๐‘  ๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ž
3๐ด๐‘  ๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘œ๐‘ฃ
ร—
1
๐›ฝ
However, ๐›ฝ = 1 since there is no redistribution of moments
Modification factor
๐‘€๐น = 0.55 +
(477 โˆ’ ๐‘“
๐‘ )
120(0.9 +
๐‘€
๐‘๐‘‘2
)
โ‰ค 2.0
Permissible deflection
๐›ฟ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘š = ๐‘€๐น ร— ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘“๐‘™๐‘’๐‘๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘œ๐‘› ๐‘โ„Ž๐‘’๐‘๐‘˜
Where the value for deflection check can be obtained from table 3.9 corresponding to the
support conditions
Actual deflection
13
๐›ฟ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก =
๐‘ ๐‘๐‘Ž๐‘›
๐‘’๐‘“๐‘“๐‘’๐‘๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘ฃ๐‘’ ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘๐‘กโ„Ž
Actual deflection should be less than the permissible deflection. Otherwise increase the
thickness of the slab
SLAB DESIGN
1. ONE WAY SPANNING SLAB
A one way slab is one in which the ratio of the longer length to the shorter one is greater than 2.
Effective span of the slab is taken as
a) The center to center distance between the bearings or
b) The clear distance between supports plus the effective depth of the slab
Example: Simply Supported Slab
Slab size =7.0 x 3m
Live Load = 3.0KN/m2
Finishes and ceiling = 2.0kN/m2
Characteristic material strengths ๐‘“๐‘๐‘ข = 25๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
and ๐‘“๐‘ฆ = 460๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
Basic span-eff depth ratio = 20(BS 8110 table 3.9)
Mild exposure condition; Aggregate size = 20mm
Solution:
๐‘™๐‘ฆ
๐‘™๐‘ฅ
โ„ = 7.0
3.0
โ„ = 2.33
14
Since 2.33>2.0, the slab is one way spanning as shown above.
NB: the slab spans in the shorter direction
๐‘กโ„Ž๐‘–๐‘๐‘˜๐‘›๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘  ๐‘œ๐‘“ ๐‘ ๐‘™๐‘Ž๐‘ =
๐‘™๐‘ฅ
26
+ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘ฃ๐‘’๐‘Ÿ + ๐›ท
2
โ„
Assume ฮฆ=10mm
=
3000
26
+ 25 + 10
2
โ„
= 145.4๐‘š๐‘š
Therefore, use 150mm thick slab
Effective depth d
๐‘‘ = ๐‘กโ„Ž๐‘–๐‘๐‘˜๐‘›๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘  ๐‘œ๐‘“ ๐‘ ๐‘™๐‘Ž๐‘(โ„Ž) โˆ’ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘›๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ก๐‘’ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘ฃ๐‘’๐‘Ÿ โˆ’ ๐›ท
2
โ„
๐‘‘ = 150 โˆ’ 25 โˆ’ 10
2
โ„ = 120
Loading
DL
Self weight of slab= โ„Ž ร— ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘›๐‘ ๐‘–๐‘ก๐‘ฆ ๐‘œ๐‘“ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘›๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ก๐‘’ = 0.15 ร— 24 = 3.6๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2
Finishes and partitions = 2.0๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2
Total Dead Load = 3.6 + 2.0 = 5.6๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2
LL
1.0kN/m2
Design Load
๐‘› = 1.4๐บ๐‘˜ + 1.6๐‘„๐‘˜
= 1.4(5.6) + 1.6(1.0)
= 9.44๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2
Bending
For 1m width, slab, udl = 9.44kN/m
15
๐‘€ =
๐‘ค๐‘™2
8
=
9.44 ร— 32
8
= 10.62๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š
๐พ =
๐‘€
๐‘๐‘‘2๐‘“๐‘๐‘ข
=
10.62 ร— 106
1000 ร— 1202 ร— 25
= 0.03
๐‘ง = 125 (0.5 + โˆš0.25 โˆ’
0.03
0.9
) = 0.97๐‘‘
0.97๐‘‘ > 0.95๐‘‘therefore๐‘ง = 0.95๐‘‘ = 0.95 ร— 120 = 116.4๐‘š๐‘š
Area of steel required
๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก =
๐‘€
0.87๐‘“
๐‘ฆ๐‘ง
=
10.62 ร— 106
0.87 ร— 460 ร— 116.4
= 228๐‘š๐‘š2
Minimum area of steel required
min ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = 0.13%๐‘โ„Ž =
0.13
100
ร— 1000 ร— 150 = 195๐‘š๐‘š2
Therefore provide Y8-200B1/B2 c/c (251mm2)
Deflection Check
Service stress
๐‘“๐‘  =
2 ร— 460 ร— 228
3 ร— 251
= 279
Modification Factor
๐‘€๐น = 0.55 +
(477 โˆ’ 279)
120(0.9 + 0.7375)
= 1.56
Permissible deflection
๐›ฟ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘š = 1.56 ร— ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘“๐‘™๐‘’๐‘๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘œ๐‘› ๐‘โ„Ž๐‘’๐‘๐‘˜
Table 3.9: for simply supported slab, deflection check (basic span-eff depth ratio) = 20
๐›ฟ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘š = 1.56 ร— 20 = 31.2๐‘š๐‘š
Actual deflection
๐›ฟ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก =
๐‘ ๐‘๐‘Ž๐‘›
๐‘’๐‘“๐‘“ ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘๐‘กโ„Ž
=
3000
120
= 25๐‘š๐‘š
๐›ฟ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก < ๐›ฟ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘šTherefore slab is adequate in deflection
Shear
Maximum shear
16
๐‘‰
๐‘š๐‘Ž๐‘ฅ =
๐‘ค๐‘™
2
=
9.44 ร— 3
2
= 14.16๐‘˜๐‘
Shear stress
๐‘ฃ =
๐‘‰
๐‘๐‘‘
=
14.16 ร— 103
1000 ร— 120
= 0.12๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
Concrete shear stress
100๐ด๐‘ 
๐‘๐‘‘
=
100 ร— 251
1000 ร— 120
= 0.21
From table 3.8 ๐‘ฃ๐‘ = 0.38๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
๐‘ฃ๐‘ > ๐‘ฃ therefore slab is adequate in shear. No shear reinforcement is required
2. CONTINUOUS ONE WAY SLAB
Analysis for a one way spanning continuous slab is done using Table 3.12 of BS 8110:1997. A
continuous slab will require bottom reinforcement as well as top reinforcement at the supports
owing to the fact that they bear moments. According to Table 3.9, the span-eff depth ratio for a
continuous slab is 26.
Example
For a one way spanning continuous slab
Finishes and partitions = 2.0kN/m2
Live load = 3.0kN/m2
Characteristic material strengths: ๐‘“
๐‘๐‘ข = 25๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
and ๐‘“
๐‘ฆ = 460๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
Concrete density = 24kN/m2
Mild cover condition
Thickness of slab
๐‘กโ„Ž๐‘–๐‘๐‘˜๐‘›๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘  ๐‘œ๐‘“ ๐‘ ๐‘™๐‘Ž๐‘ =
4500
36
+ 25 + 10
2
โ„ = 155
Therefore use 175mm thick slab
Effective depth
๐‘‘ = 175 โˆ’ 25 โˆ’ 10
2
โ„ = 145๐‘š๐‘š
Loading
DL
17
self-weight of slab = 0.175 ร— 24 = 4.2๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2
Finishes = 2.0๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2
Total Dead Load = 4.2 + 2.0 = 6.2๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2
LL
Live load = 3.0๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2
๐ท๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘–๐‘”๐‘› ๐ฟ๐‘œ๐‘Ž๐‘‘ = 1.4๐บ๐‘˜ + 1.6๐‘„๐‘˜
๐ท๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘–๐‘”๐‘› ๐ฟ๐‘œ๐‘Ž๐‘‘ = 1.4 ร— 6.2 + 1.6 ร— 3.0 = ๐Ÿ๐Ÿ‘. ๐Ÿ’๐Ÿ–๐’Œ๐‘ต/๐’Ž๐Ÿ
๐ท๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘–๐‘”๐‘› ๐ฟ๐‘œ๐‘Ž๐‘‘ = 13.48 ร— 4.5 = ๐Ÿ”๐ŸŽ. ๐Ÿ”๐Ÿ”๐’Œ๐‘ต ๐’‘๐’†๐’“ ๐’Ž๐’†๐’•๐’“๐’† ๐’˜๐’Š๐’…๐’•๐’‰
Analysis
Moments (BS 8110: table 3.12)
1. At Supports
Critical Moment at first interior support
๐‘€ = โˆ’0.086๐น๐‘™
๐‘€ = โˆ’0.086 ร— 60.66 ร— 4.5
๐‘€ = โˆ’23.48๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š
2. At Spans
Critical moment at near middle of end span
๐‘€ = 0.075๐น๐‘™
๐‘€ = 0.075 ร— 60.66 ร— 4.5
๐‘€ = 20.47๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š
Design
1. At Support
Bending
๐‘ = 2 ร— 0.15๐‘™ = 0.3๐‘™ = 0.3 ร— 4.5 = 1.35๐‘š
Clause 3.4.4.4
๐พ =
๐‘€
๐‘๐‘‘2๐‘“
๐‘๐‘ข
๐พ =
23.48 ร— 106
1350 ร— 1452 ร— 25
= 0.033
๐‘ง = ๐‘‘ {0.5 + โˆš(0.25 โˆ’
๐พ
0.9
)}
๐‘ง = ๐‘‘ {0.5 + โˆš0.25 โˆ’
0.033
0.9
}
18
๐‘ง = 0.96๐‘‘ > 0.95๐‘‘
Therefore use ๐‘ง = 0.95๐‘‘
Area of steel required
๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก =
๐‘€
0.87๐‘“
๐‘ฆ๐‘ง
=
23.48 ร— 106
0.87 ร— 460 ร— 0.95 ร— 145
๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = 426๐‘š๐‘š2
Minimum Area of steel required
min ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = 0.13%๐‘โ„Ž
=
0.13
100
ร— 1000 ร— 175
= 227.5๐‘š๐‘š2
Therefore provide Y10-175T1 (449mm2) and Y8-200T2 (251mm2)
2. At Span
Critical moment = 20.47kN/m2
Bending
๐พ =
๐‘€
๐‘๐‘‘2๐‘“
๐‘๐‘ข
๐พ =
20.47 ร— 106
1000 ร— 1452 ร— 25
๐พ = 0.039
๐‘ง = ๐‘‘ {0.5 + โˆš(0.25 โˆ’
๐พ
0.9
)}
๐‘ง = ๐‘‘ {0.5 + โˆš0.25 โˆ’
0.039
0.9
}
๐‘ง = 0.95๐‘‘
Area of Steel required
๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก =
๐‘€
0.87๐‘“
๐‘ฆ๐‘ง
=
20.47 ร— 106
0.87 ร— 460 ร— 0.95 ร— 145
= 371๐‘š๐‘š2
19
min Ast = 227.5mm2
Therefore Try Y10-200B1 (393mm2) and Y10-250B2 (314mm2)
Deflection Check
Service Stress
๐‘“๐‘  =
2๐‘“๐‘ฆ๐ด๐‘  ๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ž
3๐ด๐‘  ๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘œ๐‘ฃ
๐‘“
๐‘  =
2 ร— 460 ร— 371
3 ร— 393
= 296
Modification Factor
๐‘€๐น = 0.55 +
(477 โˆ’ ๐‘“๐‘ )
120(0.9 +
๐‘€
๐‘๐‘‘2)
โ‰ค 2.0
= 0.55 +
477 โˆ’ 296
120(0.9 + 0.975)
๐‘€๐น = 1.35 < 2.0 therefore ok
Permissible deflection
For continuous slab, basic span-effective depth ratio according to table 3.9 is 26
๐›ฟ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘š = 1.35 ร— 26
= 35.1๐‘š๐‘š
Actual deflection
๐›ฟ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก =
๐‘ ๐‘๐‘Ž๐‘›
๐‘’๐‘“๐‘“ ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘๐‘กโ„Ž
=
4500
145
= 31.03๐‘š๐‘š
๐›ฟ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก < ๐›ฟ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘štherefore slab is adequate in deflection
Shear
Maximum shear
๐‘‰
๐‘š๐‘Ž๐‘ฅ = 0.6๐น = 0.6 ร— 60.66 = 36.40๐‘˜๐‘
Shear stress
๐‘ฃ =
๐‘‰
๐‘๐‘‘
=
36.40 ร— 103
1000 ร— 145
= 0.25๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
Concrete shear stress
20
100๐ด๐‘ 
๐‘๐‘‘
=
100 ร— 393
1000 ร— 145
= 0.27
From table 3.8, ๐‘ฃ๐‘ = 0.41๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
Since ๐‘ฃ๐‘ > ๐‘ฃ no shear reinforcement is required
3. TWO WAY SPANNING SLAB
When a slab is supported on all four of its sides, it effectively spans in both directions. And so
reinforcement on both directions has to be obtained. If the slab is square and the restraints
similar, then the load will span equally in both directions. If the slab is rectangular then more
than half the load will span in the shorter direction.
Moments in each direction of span are generally calculated using coefficients in BS 8110 table
3.13 or 3.14 depending on the support system. Areas of reinforcement to resist moments are
determined independently for each direction.
The span effective depth ratios are based on the shorter span and the percentage of
reinforcement in that direction
a) Simply Supported Slab Spanning in Two Directions
A slab simply supported on its four sides will deflect about both axes under load and the
corners will tend to lift and curl up from the supports, causing torsional moments. When no
provision has been made to prevent this lifting or to resist the torsion then the moment
coefficients of table 3.13 may be used and maximum moment given by:
๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฅ = ๐›ผ๐‘ ๐‘ฅ๐‘›๐‘™๐‘ฅ
2
๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฆ = ๐›ผ๐‘ ๐‘ฆ๐‘›๐‘™๐‘ฅ
2
Where๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฅand ๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฆ are moments at mid-span on strips of unit width with spans ๐‘™๐‘ฆ and ๐‘™๐‘ฅ
The area of reinforcement in the direction ๐‘™๐‘ฅ and ๐‘™๐‘ฆ respectively are
๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ฅ =
๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฅ
0.87๐‘“
๐‘ฆ๐‘ง
And
๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ฆ =
๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฆ
0.87๐‘“
๐‘ฆ๐‘ง
Example
Design a simply supported reinforced concrete slab shown below.
Finishes and partitions = 2.0kN/m2
Live load = 3.5kN/m2
21
Mild exposure conditions (therefore concrete cover = 25mm)
Solution
Slab sizing
Condition โ€“ simply supported
Assume bar diameters of 10mm
๐‘กโ„Ž๐‘–๐‘๐‘˜๐‘›๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘  ๐‘œ๐‘“ ๐‘ ๐‘™๐‘Ž๐‘ =
๐‘™๐‘ฅ
26
+ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘›๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ก๐‘’ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘ฃ๐‘’๐‘Ÿ + ๐›ท
2
โ„
=
3000
26
+ 25 + 10
2
โ„ = 145.4๐‘š๐‘š
Adopt 150mm slab
๐‘‘ = ๐‘กโ„Ž๐‘–๐‘๐‘˜๐‘›๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘  ๐‘œ๐‘“ ๐‘ ๐‘™๐‘Ž๐‘(โ„Ž) โˆ’ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘›๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ก๐‘’ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘ฃ๐‘’๐‘Ÿ โˆ’ ๐›ท
2
โ„
๐‘‘ = 150 โˆ’ 25 โˆ’ 10
2
โ„ = 120๐‘š๐‘š
Loading
DL
Self weight of slab = 0.15 ร— 24 = 3.6๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2
Finishes and partitions = 2.0๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2
Total Dead Load = 3.6 + 2.0 = 5.6๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2
LL = 3.5๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2
Design Load
22
๐‘› = 1.4๐บ๐‘˜ + 1.6๐‘„๐‘˜ = 1.4 ร— 5.6 + 1.6 ร— 3.5 = 13.44๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2
Analysis
๐‘™๐‘ฆ
๐‘™๐‘ฅ
โ„ = 4.5
3
โ„ = 1.5 < 2.0 therefore two way spanning
For simply supported beam, use table 3.13 (also shown below) in analysis
๐‘™๐‘ฆ ๐‘™๐‘ฅ
โ„ 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.75 2.0
๐›ผ๐‘ ๐‘ฅ 0.062 0.074 0.084 0.093 0.099 0.104 0.113 0.118
๐›ผ๐‘ ๐‘ฆ 0.062 0.061 0.059 0.055 0.051 0.046 0.037 0.029
Clause 3.5.3.3
๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฅ = ๐›ผ๐‘ ๐‘ฅ๐‘›๐‘™๐‘ฅ
2
๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฆ = ๐›ผ๐‘ ๐‘ฆ๐‘›๐‘™๐‘ฅ
2
Therefore,
๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฅ = 0.104 ร— 13.44 ร— 3.02
= 12.58๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š
๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฆ = 0.046 ร— 13.44 ร— 3.02
= 5.56๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š
Design
In the x direction
Bending
Consider 1m width of slab
๐พ =
๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฅ
๐‘๐‘‘2๐‘“
๐‘๐‘ข
=
12.58 ร— 106
1000 ร— 1202 ร— 25
= 0.035
๐‘ง = 0.96๐‘‘ > 0.95๐‘‘ therefore use ๐‘ง = 0.95๐‘‘
Area of steel required
๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก =
๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฅ
0.87๐‘“
๐‘ฆ๐‘ง
=
12.58 ร— 106
0.87 ร— 460 ร— 0.95 ร— 120
= 276๐‘š๐‘š2
Minimum area of steel required
min ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = 0.13%๐‘โ„Ž =
0.13
100
ร— 1000 ร— 150 = 195๐‘š๐‘š2
Therefore provide Y10-250B1 (314mm2) and Y8-250B2 (201mm2)
23
Deflection Check
Service stress
๐‘“๐‘  =
2๐‘“
๐‘ฆ๐ด๐‘  ๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ž
3๐ด๐‘  ๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘œ๐‘ฃ
=
2 ร— 460 ร— 276
3 ร— 314
= 270
Modification Factor
๐‘€๐น = 0.55 +
477 โˆ’ ๐‘“
๐‘ 
120 (0.9 +
๐‘€
๐‘๐‘‘2
)
= 0.55 +
477 โˆ’ 270
120(0.9 + 0.8736)
๐‘€๐น = 1.52 < 2.0 โˆด ๐‘œ๐‘˜
Permissible deflection
For simply supported slab, basic span-effective depth ratio according to table 3.9 is 20
๐›ฟ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘š = 1.52 ร— 20 = 30.4๐‘š๐‘š
Actual deflection
๐›ฟ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก =
๐‘ ๐‘๐‘Ž๐‘›
๐‘’๐‘“๐‘“ ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘๐‘กโ„Ž
=
3000
120
= 25.0๐‘š๐‘š
๐›ฟ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก < ๐›ฟ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘štherefore slab is adequate in deflection
b) Restrained Slab Spanning in Two directions
When slabs have fixity at the supports and reinforcement is added to resist torsion and to
prevent the corners of the slab from lifting then the maximum moments per unit width are
given by
๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฅ = ๐›ฝ๐‘ ๐‘ฅ๐‘›๐‘™๐‘ฅ
2
๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฆ = ๐›ฝ๐‘ ๐‘ฆ๐‘›๐‘™๐‘ฅ
2
The values - ๐›ฝ๐‘ ๐‘ฅ and ๐›ฝ๐‘ ๐‘ฆare obtained as per table 3.14 of BS8110
The slab is divided into middle and edge strips as shown below
Once the moments and shear have been obtained, design is done as in the previous example
24
Example (Continuous 2 way spanning slab)
Consider the corner panel shown below. The panel has a dead load of 4kN/m2 and a live load of
2.75kN/m2. Design the slab
Solution
Slab sizing
For a continuous slab,
๐‘กโ„Ž๐‘–๐‘๐‘˜๐‘›๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘  ๐‘œ๐‘“ ๐‘ ๐‘™๐‘Ž๐‘ =
๐‘™๐‘ฅ
36
+ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘ฃ๐‘’๐‘Ÿ + ๐›ท
2
โ„ =
4000
36
+ 25 +
10
2
= 141.11๐‘š๐‘š
Therefore try 150mm slab
Assume bar diameter of 12mm
๐‘‘ = ๐‘กโ„Ž๐‘–๐‘๐‘˜๐‘›๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘  ๐‘œ๐‘“ ๐‘ ๐‘™๐‘Ž๐‘(โ„Ž) โˆ’ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘›๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ก๐‘’ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘ฃ๐‘’๐‘Ÿ โˆ’ ๐›ท
2
โ„ = 150 โˆ’ 25 โˆ’ 10
2
โ„ = 120๐‘š๐‘š
Loading
DL
Self weight of slab = 0.175 ร— 24 = 4.2๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2
25
Other load = 4.0๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2
Total load = 4.2 + 4.0 = 8.2๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2
LL
Live load = 2.75๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2
Design load
๐‘› = 1.4๐บ๐‘˜ + 1.6๐‘„๐‘˜
= 1.4 ร— 8.2 + 1.6 ร— 2.75
= 15.88๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2
Analysis
๐‘™๐‘ฆ
๐‘™๐‘ฅ
=
4.8
4.0
= 1.2
Using table 3.14
Condition: 2 adjacent edges discontinuous
1. At support
Short span
๐›ฝ๐‘ ๐‘ฅ = 0.063
๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฅ = ๐›ฝ๐‘ ๐‘ฅ๐‘›๐‘™๐‘ฅ
2
= 0.063 ร— 15.88 ร— 42
= 16.01๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š
Long span
๐›ฝ๐‘ ๐‘ฆ = 0.045
๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฆ = ๐›ฝ๐‘ ๐‘ฆ๐‘›๐‘™๐‘ฅ
2
= 0.045 ร— 15.88 ร— 42
= 11.43๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š
Critical Moment = 16.01kNm
2. At span
Short span
๐›ฝ๐‘ ๐‘ฅ = 0.047
๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฅ = ๐›ฝ๐‘ ๐‘ฅ๐‘›๐‘™๐‘ฅ
2
= 0.047 ร— 15.88 ร— 42
= 11.94๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š
Long span
๐›ฝ๐‘ ๐‘ฆ = 0.034
๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฆ = ๐›ฝ๐‘ ๐‘ฆ๐‘›๐‘™๐‘ฅ
2
= 0.034 ร— 15.88 ร— 42
= 8.64๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š
Critical Moment = 11.94kNm
26
Design
1. At support
Bending (clause 3.4.4.4)
๐‘ = 2 ร— 0.15๐‘™ = 0.3 ร— 4.0 = 1.2๐‘š
In x direction
๐พ =
๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฅ
๐‘๐‘‘2๐‘“
๐‘๐‘ข
=
16.01 ร— 106
1200 ร— 1202 ร— 25
= 0.037
๐‘ง = 0.95๐‘‘
Area of steel required
๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก =
๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฅ
0.87๐‘“๐‘ฆ๐‘ง
=
16.01 ร— 106
0.87 ร— 460 ร— 0.95 ร— 120
= 351๐‘š๐‘š2
Minimum area of steel required
min ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = 0.13%๐‘โ„Ž =
0.13
100
ร— 1000 ร— 150 = 195๐‘š๐‘š2
Try Y10-200T1 (393mm2)
In y direction
M=11.43kNm
๐พ =
๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฆ
๐‘๐‘‘2๐‘“
๐‘๐‘ข
=
11.43 ร— 106
1200 ร— 1202 ร— 25
= 0.028
๐‘ง = 0.97๐‘‘ > 0.95๐‘‘ therefore ๐‘ง = 0.95๐‘‘
Area of steel required
๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก =
๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฆ
0.87๐‘“๐‘ฆ๐‘ง
=
11.43 ร— 106
0.87 ร— 460 ร— 0.95 ร— 120
= 250๐‘š๐‘š2
min ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = 0.13%๐‘โ„Ž =
0.13
100
ร— 1000 ร— 150 = 195๐‘š๐‘š2
Therefore provide Y8-200T2 (251mm2)
2. At span
In the x direction
11.94kNm
๐พ =
๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฅ
๐‘๐‘‘2๐‘“
๐‘๐‘ข
=
11.94 ร— 106
1000 ร— 1202 ร— 25
= 0.033
27
๐‘ง = 0.96๐‘‘ > 0.95๐‘‘ therefore ๐‘ง = 0.95๐‘‘
Area of steel required
๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก =
๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฅ
0.87๐‘“๐‘ฆ๐‘ง
=
11.94 ร— 106
0.87 ร— 460 ร— 0.95 ร— 120
= 262๐‘š๐‘š2
Minimum area of steel required
min ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = 0.13%๐‘โ„Ž =
0.13
100
ร— 1000 ร— 150 = 195๐‘š๐‘š2
Therefore provide Y10-250B1 (314mm2)
In the y direction
8.64kNm
๐พ =
๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฆ
๐‘๐‘‘2๐‘“
๐‘๐‘ข
=
8.64 ร— 106
1000 ร— 1202 ร— 25
= 0.024
๐‘ง = 0.97๐‘‘ > 0.95๐‘‘ therefore ๐‘ง = 0.95๐‘‘
Area of steel required
๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก =
๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฆ
0.87๐‘“๐‘ฆ๐‘ง
=
8.64 ร— 106
0.87 ร— 460 ร— 0.95 ร— 120
= 189๐‘š๐‘š2
Minimum area of steel required
min ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = 0.13%๐‘โ„Ž =
0.13
100
ร— 1000 ร— 150 = 195๐‘š๐‘š2
Therefore provide Y8-250B2 (201mm2)
Deflection Check
Service stress
๐‘“๐‘  =
2๐‘“
๐‘ฆ๐ด๐‘  ๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ž
3๐ด๐‘  ๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘œ๐‘ฃ
=
2 ร— 460 ร— 262
3 ร— 314
= 256๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
28
Modification Factor
๐‘€๐น = 0.55 +
477 โˆ’ ๐‘“
๐‘ 
120 (0.9 +
๐‘€
๐‘๐‘‘2
)
= 0.55 +
477 โˆ’ 256
120(0.9 + 0.825)
= 1.62 < 2.0 โˆด ๐‘œ๐‘˜
Permissible deflection
For a continuous slab, the basic span effective depth ratio according to table 3.9 is 26
๐›ฟ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘š = 1.62 ร— 26 = 42.12๐‘š๐‘š
Actual deflection
๐›ฟ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก =
๐‘ ๐‘๐‘Ž๐‘›
๐‘’๐‘“๐‘“ ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘๐‘กโ„Ž
=
4000
120
= 33.33๐‘š๐‘š
๐›ฟ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก < ๐›ฟ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘štherefore slab is adequate in deflection
4. RIBBED AND HOLLOW BLOCK FLOORS (BS 8110 โ€“ clause 3.6)
Ribbed floors are made by using temporary or permanent shuttering while hollow block floors
are made by using precast hollow blocks made of clay or concrete which contains light
aggregate.
Advantages of Hollow Block Floors
๏‚ท The principle advantage of these floors is the reduction in weight achieved by removing part
of the concrete below the neutral axis and in the case of hollow blocks, replacing it with
lighter material
๏‚ท Hollow Block floors are more economical for buildings which have long spans
Slab thickening is provided near the supports in order to achieve greater shear strength, and if
the slab is supported by a monolithic concrete beam the solid section acts as the flange of a T-
section. The ribs should be checked for shear at the junction with the solid slab.
Hollow blocks should be soaked in water before placing concrete in order to avoid cracking of
the top concrete flange due to shrinkage
29
Example
A ribbed floor continuous over several equal spans of 5.0m is constructed with permanent
fiberglass moulds. The characteristic material strengths are ๐‘“
๐‘๐‘ข = 25๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
and ๐‘“
๐‘ฆ =
250๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
. Characteristic dead load = 4.5kN/m2. Characteristic live load = 2.5kN/m2
Solution
Loading
๐‘ข๐‘™๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘š๐‘Ž๐‘ก๐‘’ ๐‘™๐‘œ๐‘Ž๐‘‘๐‘–๐‘›๐‘” = 0.4(1.4๐บ๐‘˜ + 1.6๐‘„๐‘˜)
= 0.4(1.4 ร— 4.5 + 1.6 ร— 2.5)
= 4.12๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š
Ultimate load on span F
๐น = 4.12 ร— 5.0 = 20.6๐‘˜๐‘
Bending
1. At mid span: design as T-section
๐‘€ = 0.063๐น๐‘™
๐‘€ = 0.063 ร— 20.6 ร— 5.0
= 6.49๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š
๐พ =
๐‘€
๐‘๐‘“๐‘‘2๐‘“
๐‘๐‘ข
=
6.49 ร— 106
400 ร— 1702 ร— 25
= 0.022
๐‘ง = 0.95๐‘‘
๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก =
๐‘€
0.87๐‘“
๐‘ฆ๐‘ง
=
6.49 ร— 106
0.87 ร— 460 ร— 0.95 ร— 170
= 100๐‘š๐‘š2
Therefore provide 2Y8B in the ribs (101mm2)
2. At support โ€“ design a rectangular section for the slab
๐‘€ = 0.063๐น๐‘™
๐‘€ = 0.063 ร— 20.6 ร— 5.0
30
= 6.49๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š
๐พ =
๐‘€
๐‘๐‘‘2๐‘“
๐‘๐‘ข
=
6.49 ร— 106
100 ร— 1702 ร— 25
= 0.090
๐‘ง = 0.88๐‘‘
๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก =
๐‘€
0.87๐‘“
๐‘ฆ๐‘ง
=
6.49 ร— 106
0.87 ร— 460 ร— 0.88 ร— 170
= 108๐‘š๐‘š2
Therefore provide 2Y10B in the ribs (157mm2) in each 0.4m width of slab
3. At the section where the ribs terminate: this occurs 0.6m from the centre line of the
support and the moment may be hogging so that the 100mm ribs must provide the
concrete area required to develop the design moment. The maximum moment of
resistance of the concrete ribs is
๐‘€ = 0.156๐‘“
๐‘๐‘ข๐‘๐‘‘2
๐‘€ = 0.156 ร— 25 ร— 100 ร— 1702
= 11.27๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š
Which must be greater than the moment at this section, therefore compression steel is
not required.
Deflection Check
At mid span
100๐ด๐‘ 
๐‘๐‘‘
=
100 ร— 101
400 ร— 170
= 0.15
Table 3.11 Modification factor = 1.05 for 460N/mm2. Therefore, for 250N/mm2, MF=1.93
๐‘๐‘ค
๐‘
=
100
400
= 0.25 < 0.3 โˆด basic span โˆ’ eff depth ratio = 20.8
Permissible deflection
๐›ฟ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘š = 1.93 ร— 20.8
= 40.14๐‘š๐‘š
Actual deflection
๐›ฟ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก =
๐‘ ๐‘๐‘Ž๐‘›
๐‘’๐‘“๐‘“๐‘’๐‘๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘ฃ๐‘’ ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘๐‘กโ„Ž
=
5000
170
๐›ฟ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก = 29.4๐‘š๐‘š
31
Actual deflection is less than the permissible deflection. Therefore, the rib is adequate in
deflection.
Shear
With 0.6m of slab provided at the support, maximum shear in the rib 0.6m from the support
centre line will be
= 0.5๐น โˆ’ 0.6 ร— 4.12
= 0.5 ร— 20.6 โˆ’ 2.5
= 7.83๐‘˜๐‘
Shear stress
๐œˆ =
๐‘‰
๐‘๐‘‘
=
7.83 ร— 103
100 ร— 170
= 0.46๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
100๐ด๐‘ 
๐‘๐‘‘
=
100 ร— 101
100 ร— 170
= 0.59
Therefore, concrete shear stress will be ๐œˆ๐‘ = 0.65๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
Therefore, the section is adequate in shear
Topping reinforcement
Clause 3.6.6.2
Consider 1m width of slab
=
0.12
100
ร— 50 ร— 1000 = 60๐‘š๐‘š2
/๐‘š
Therefore provide A65-BRC mesh topping.
Ribbed slab proportions (section 3.6 BS 8110)
The main requirements are:
1. The centres of ribs should not exceed 1.5m
2. The depth of ribs excluding topping should not exceed four times their average width
3. The minimum rib width should be determined by consideration of cover, bar spacing and
fire resistance
4. The thickness of structural topping or flange should not be less than 50mm or one-tenth of
the clear distance between ribs (Table 3.17)
32
Table 3.17 (BS 8110-1997)
Type of slab Minimum thickness of topping (mm)
Slabs with permanent blocks
a) Clear distance between ribs not more
than 500mm jointed in cement: sand
mortar not weaker than 1:3 or
11N/mm2
b) Clear distance between ribs not more
than 500mm, not jointed in cement:
sand mortar
c) All other slabs with permanent blocks
25
30
40 or one-tenth of clear distance between
ribs, whichever is greater
All slabs without permanent blocks
For slabs without permanent blocks
50 or one-tenth of clear distance between
ribs, whichever is greater
Topping Reinforcement (Clause3.6.6.2)
A light reinforcing mesh in the topping flange can give added strength and durability to the slab,
particularly if there are concentrated or moving loads, or if cracking due to shrinkage or thermal
movements is likely.
Clause 3.6.6.2 specifies that the cross sectional area of the mesh be not less than 12% of the
topping in each direction. The spacing between wires should not be greater than half the centre
to centre distance between ribs.
5. FLAT SLAB DESIGN
A flat slab floor is a reinforced concrete slab supported by concrete columns without the use of
intermediary beams. The slab may be of constant thickness throughout or in the area of the
column it may be thickened as a drop panel. The column may also be of constant section or it
may be flared to form a column head or capital.
The drop panels are effective in reducing the shearing stresses where the column is liable to
punch through the slab, and they also provide an increased moment of resistance where the
negative moments are greatest.
Advantages of flat slab over slab and beam slab
๏‚ท The simplified formwork and the reduced storey heights make it more economical
๏‚ท Windows can extend up to the underside of the slab
๏‚ท There are no beams to obstruct the light and the circulation of air
๏‚ท The absence of sharp corners gives greater fire resistance as there is less danger of
concrete spalling and exposing the reinforcement
33
(a) Slab without drop panel or column head; (b) floor with column head but no drop panel; (c)
Floor with drop panel and column head
General code provisions
The design of slabs is covered in BS8110: Part 1, section 3.7. General requirements are given in
clause 3.7.1, as follows.
1. The ratio of the longer to the shorter span should not exceed 2.
2. Design moments may be obtained by
(a) Equivalent frame method
(b) Simplified method
(c) Finite element analysis
3. The effective dimension ๐‘™โ„Ž of the column head is taken as the lesser of
(a) The actual dimension ๐‘™โ„Ž๐‘ or
(b) ๐‘™โ„Ž๐‘š๐‘Ž๐‘ฅ =๐‘™๐‘+2(๐‘‘โ„Žโˆ’40)
Where ๐‘™๐‘ is the column dimension measured in the same direction as๐‘™โ„Ž. For a flared
head ๐‘™โ„Ž๐‘ is measured 40 mm below the slab or drop. Column head dimensions and the
effective dimension for some cases are shown in BS8110: Part 1, Fig. 3.11.
4. The effective diameter of a column or column head is as follows:
(a) For a column, the diameter of a circle whose area equals the area of the column
(b) For a column head, the area of the column head based on the effective dimensions
defined in requirement 3
The effective diameter of the column or column head must not be greater than one
quarter of the shorter span framing into the column.
5. Drop panels only influence the distribution of moments if the smaller dimension of the
drop is at least equal to one-third of the smaller panel dimension. Smaller drops provide
resistance to punching shear.
(b)
(c)
34
6. The panel thickness is generally controlled by deflection. The thickness should not be
less than 125 mm
METHODS OF ANALYSIS
Analysis of the slab may be done by dividing the slab into frames or by empirical analysis.
(a) Frame analysis method
The structure is divided longitudinally and transversely into frames consisting of columns and
strips of slab. The entire frame or sub-frames can be analyzed by moment distribution.
At first interior
support
At centre of interior
span
At interior support
Moment -0.063Fl +0.071Fl -0.055Fl
Shear 0.6F 0.5F
Moments and shear forces for flat slabs for internal panels
l= l1โˆ’2hc/3, effective span; l1, panel length parallel to the centre-to-centre span of the
columns; hc, effective diameter of the column or column head (section 8.7.2(d)); F, total design
load on the strip of slab between adjacent columns due to 1.4 times the dead load plus 1.6
times the imposed load.
(b) Empirical method
The empirical method is the most commonly used method of analysis
Conditions to be met when using empirical analysis
๏‚ท The panels should be rectangular and of uniform thickness with at least 3 rows in both
directions. Ratio of length to width should not exceed 1.33
๏‚ท Shear walls should be provided to resist lateral forces
๏‚ท Lengths and widths of adjacent panels should not vary by more than 15%.
๏‚ท Drops should be rectangular and their length in each direction must not be less than
one-third of the corresponding panel length
35
(c) Simplified method
Moments and shears may be taken from Table 3.19 of the code for structures where lateral
stability does not depend on slab-column connections. The following provisions apply:
1. Design is based on the single load case
2. The structure has at least three rows of panels of approximately equal span in the direction
considered.
The design moments and shears for internal panels are obtained from Table 3.19 of the code
Design of internal panel and reinforcement details
The slab reinforcement is designed to resist moments derived from table 3.19 and 3.20 of the
code. Clause 3.7.3.1 states that for an internal panel, two-thirds of the amount of
reinforcement required to resist negative moment in the column strip should be placed in a
central zone of width one-half of the column strip.
Example: Internal panel of flat slab floor
The floor of a building constructed of flat slabs is 30 mร—24 m. The column centres are 6 m in
both directions and the building is braced with shear walls. The panels are to have drops of 3
mร—3 m. The depth of the drops is 250 mm and the slab depth is 200 mm. The internal columns
are 450 mm square and the column heads are 900 mm square.
The loading is as follows:
Dead load =self-weight+2.5 kN/m2 for screed, floor finishes, partitions and ceiling
Imposed load =3.5 kN/m2
The materials are grade 30 concrete and grade 250 reinforcement.
Design an internal panel next to an edge panel on two sides and show the reinforcement on a
sketch.
36
๐‘™โ„Ž0 = 870๐‘š๐‘š
๐‘™โ„Ž๐‘š๐‘Ž๐‘ฅ =๐‘™๐‘+2(๐‘‘โ„Žโˆ’40)
๐‘™โ„Ž๐‘š๐‘Ž๐‘ฅ = 450 + 2(600 โˆ’ 40) = 1570๐‘š๐‘š
โ„Ž๐‘ = โˆš
4 ร— 8702
๐œ‹
= 982๐‘š๐‘š โ‰ฏ 0.25 ร— 6000 = 1500๐‘š๐‘š
37
The effective span is
๐‘™ = 6000 โˆ’ 2 ร—
982
3
= 5345๐‘š๐‘š
Design loads and moments
The average load due to the weight of slabs and drops is
[(9 ร— 0.25) + (27 ร— 0.2)] ร—
23.6
36
= 5.02๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2
Design load
๐‘› = 1.4๐บ๐‘˜ + 1.6๐‘„๐‘˜ = 1.4(5.02 + 2.5) + 1.6(3.5) = 16.13๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2
The total design load on the strip slab adjacent to the column is
๐น = 16.13 ร— 6 = 580.7๐‘˜๐‘
The moments in the flat slab calculated using coefficients from table 3.19 of the code and the
distribution of the design moments in the panels of the flat slab is made in accordance with
table 3.20. the moments in the flat slab are as follows. For the first interior support,
โˆ’0.063 ร— 580.7 ร— 5.35 = โˆ’195.7๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š
For the centre of the interior span
+0.071 ร— 580.7 ร— 5.35 = 220.6๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š
The distribution in the panels is as follows. For the column strip
๐‘›๐‘’๐‘”๐‘Ž๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘ฃ๐‘’๐‘š๐‘œ๐‘š๐‘’๐‘›๐‘ก = โˆ’0.75 ร— 195.7 = โˆ’146.8๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š
๐‘๐‘œ๐‘ ๐‘–๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘ฃ๐‘’๐‘š๐‘œ๐‘š๐‘’๐‘›๐‘ก = 0.55 ร— 2250.6 = 121.3๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š
For middle strip
๐‘›๐‘’๐‘”๐‘Ž๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘ฃ๐‘’๐‘š๐‘œ๐‘š๐‘’๐‘›๐‘ก = โˆ’0.25 ร— 195.7 = โˆ’48.9๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š
๐‘๐‘œ๐‘ ๐‘–๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘ฃ๐‘’๐‘š๐‘œ๐‘š๐‘’๐‘›๐‘ก = 0.45 ร— 220.6 = 99.3๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š
Design of moment reinforcement
The cover is 25mm and 16mm diameter bars in 2 layers are assumed. At eh drop the effective
depth for the inner layer is 250 โˆ’ 25 โˆ’ 16 โˆ’ 8 = 201๐‘š๐‘š
In the slab the effective depth is
200 โˆ’ 25 โˆ’ 16 โˆ’ 8 = 151๐‘š๐‘š
The design calculations for the reinforcement in the column and middle strip are made using
b=3000mm
Column strip negative reinforcement
๐‘€
๐‘๐‘‘2
=
146.8 ร— 106
3000 ร— 2012
= 1.21
38
From the table above, M/bd2<1.27
Therefore
๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก =
๐‘€
0.87๐‘“
๐‘ฆ๐‘ง
=
146.8 ร— 106
0.87 ร— 460 ร— 0.95 ร— 201
= 3534๐‘š๐‘š2
Provide 19bars 16mm in diameter to give an area of 3819mm2. Two thirds of the bars i.e.
13bars are placed in the centre half of the columns strip at a spacing of 125mm. a further four
bars are placed in each of the outer strips at a spacing of 190mm. this gives 21 bars in total
39
Column strip positive reinforcement
๐‘€
๐‘๐‘‘2
=
121.3 ร— 106
3000 ร— 1512
= 1.77
From the diagram above, M/bd2>1.27 Therefore
100๐ด๐‘ 
๐‘๐‘‘
= 0.92
๐ด๐‘  = 0.92 ร— 3000 ร—
151
100
= 4167.6๐‘š๐‘š2
Provide 21 16mm bars spaced at 150mm (4221mm2)
Middle strip negative reinforcement
๐‘€
๐‘๐‘‘2
=
48.9 ร— 106
3000 ร— 1512
= 0.71 < 1.27
Therefore
๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก =
๐‘€
0.87๐‘“
๐‘ฆ๐‘ง
=
48.9 ร— 106
0.87 ร— 250 ร— 0.95 ร— 151
= 1567.3๐‘š๐‘š2
Therefore provide 15 bars 12mm diameter at 200mm (1695mm2)
Middle strip positive moment
๐‘€
๐‘๐‘‘2
=
99.3 ร— 106
3000 ร— 1512
= 1.45 > 1.27
Therefore
100๐ด๐‘ 
๐‘๐‘‘
= 0.75
๐ด๐‘  = 0.75 ร— 3000 ร—
151
100
= 3397.5๐‘š๐‘š2
Therefore provide 18 bars 16mm diameter at 175mm (3618mm2)
Shear
Shear
๐‘‰ = 1.15 ร— 16.13(36 โˆ’ 0.872) = 653.7๐‘˜๐‘
Shear stress (clause 3.7.7.2)
๐œˆ =
๐‘‰
๐‘ข0๐‘‘
=
653.7 ร— 103
4 ร— 870 ร— 201
= 0.93๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
< 0.8โˆš๐‘“
๐‘๐‘ข
Therefore maximum shear force is satisfactory
1. At 1.5d from the face of the column
Perimeter u = 4[(2 ร— 1.5 ร— 201) + 870] = 5892๐‘š๐‘š
Shear ๐‘‰ = 1.15 ร— 16.13(36 โˆ’ 1.4732) = 627.5๐‘˜๐‘
40
Shear stress
๐œˆ =
๐‘‰
๐‘ข๐‘‘
=
627.5 ร— 103
5892 ร— 201
= 0.53๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
In the centre half of the column strip 16mm diameter bars are spaced at 125mm (1608mm2)
100๐ด๐‘ 
๐‘๐‘‘
=
100 ร— 1608
1000 ร— 201
= 0.8
From table 3.8, ๐‘ฃ๐‘ = 0.67 ร— (
30
25
)
1
3
โ„
= 0.71๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
๐‘ฃ๐‘ > ๐‘ฃ โˆด no shear reinforcement is required
Deflection Check
Service stress
๐‘“
๐‘  =
2๐‘“๐‘ฆ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ž
3๐ด๐‘ ๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘œ๐‘ฃ
=
2 ร— 250 ร— 3782.5
3 ร— 3919.5
= 150.8๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
Modification Factor
๐‘€๐น = 0.55 +
477 โˆ’ ๐‘“
๐‘ 
120 (0.9 +
๐‘€
๐‘๐‘‘2)
= 0.55 +
477 โˆ’ 150.8
120(0.9 + 1.61)
= 1.63
Permissible deflection
๐›ฟ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘š = 1.63 ร— 26 = 42.4๐‘š๐‘š
Actual deflection
๐›ฟ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก =
๐‘ ๐‘๐‘Ž๐‘›
๐‘’๐‘“๐‘“๐‘’๐‘๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘ฃ๐‘’๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘๐‘กโ„Ž
=
6000
151
= 39.7๐‘š๐‘š
The slab is therefore ok in deflection
Cracking
According to Clause 3.12.11.2.7 maximum spacing between bars should be the lesser of 750mm
of 3 times the effective depth.
For drop panel 3๐‘‘ = 3 ร— 201 = 603๐‘š๐‘š
For slab 3๐‘‘ = 3 ร— 151 = 453๐‘š๐‘š
No reinforcement spacing exceeds these therefore ok.
41
Arrangement of bars
Arrangement of bars is as shown below
42
SUMMARY ON SLAB DESIGN
1. Dimensional Considerations
The two principal dimensional considerations for a one way spanning slab are its width and
effective span.
2. Reinforcement areas
Sufficient reinforcement must be provided in order to control cracking. Minimum area of
reinforcement should be
๏‚ท 0.24% of total concrete area when fy=250N/mm2
๏‚ท 0.13% of total concrete area when fy=460N/mm2
The minimum area of distribution steel is the same as for the minimum main reinforcement
area. The size of bars for the slab should not be less than 10mm diameter. They should also
not exceed 20mm.
3. Minimum spacing of reinforcement
The minimum spacing between bars should be = โ„Ž๐‘Ž๐‘”๐‘” + 5๐‘š๐‘š. The size of poker used to
compact concrete also affects the spacing between bars. The most commonly used poker is
40mm in diameter. The spacing between bars should therefore be about 50mm. However,
for practical reasons, the spacing in between bars should not be less than 150mm
4. Maximum spacing of reinforcement
The clear distance between bars in a slab should never exceed the lesser of 3 times the
effective depth or 750mm. However, for practical reasons, the spacing of bars in a slab
should not be more than 300mm
5. Bending ULS
6. Cracking SLS
7. Deflection SLS
8. Shear ULS
For practical reasons, BS 8110 does not recommend the inclusion of shear reinforcement in
solid slabs less than 200mm deep. This therefore implies that the design shear stress should
not exceed the concrete shear stress
43
BEAMS
Beams are flexural horizontal members. The 2 common types of reinforced concrete beam
section are
1. Rectangular section
2. Flanged sections of either โ€“ L and T
1. Rectangular Singly Reinforced beam
The concrete stress is
This is generally rounded off to 0.45fcu. The strain is 0.0035 as shown in the figure above
Referring to table 2.2for high yield bars, the steel stress is
๐‘“๐‘ฆ
1.15
โ„ = 0.87๐‘“
๐‘ฆ
From the stress diagram above, the internal forces are
C =force in the concrete in compression
44
= 0.447๐‘“
๐‘๐‘ข ร— 0.9๐‘ ร— 0.5๐‘‘
= 0.201๐‘“
๐‘๐‘ข๐‘๐‘‘
T =force in the steel in tension
= 0.87๐‘“
๐‘ฆ๐ด๐‘ 
For the internal forces to be in equilibrium C=T.
๐‘ง = ๐‘™๐‘’๐‘ฃ๐‘’๐‘Ÿ ๐‘Ž๐‘Ÿ๐‘š
= ๐‘‘ โˆ’ 0.5 ร— 0.9 ร— 0.5๐‘‘
= 0.775๐‘‘
MRC=moment of resistance with respect to the concrete
= ๐ถ ร— ๐‘ง
= 0.201๐‘“
๐‘๐‘ข๐‘๐‘‘ ร— 0.775๐‘‘
= 0.156๐‘“
๐‘๐‘ข๐‘๐‘‘2
= ๐พ๐‘“๐‘๐‘ข๐‘๐‘‘2
Where the constant K=0.156
๐‘€ = ๐พ๐‘๐‘‘2
๐‘“๐‘๐‘ข
๐พ =
๐‘€
๐‘๐‘‘2๐‘“๐‘๐‘ข
MRT=moment of resistance with respect to the steel
= ๐‘‡ ร— ๐‘ง
= 0.87๐‘“
๐‘ฆ๐ด๐‘  ร— ๐‘ง
๐ด๐‘  =
๐‘€
0.87๐‘“
๐‘ฆ๐‘ง
2. Flanged beams
There are two types of flanged beams namely
๏‚ท L-beam โ€“ mostly found at edges
๏‚ท T-beam
45
T and L beams form part of a concrete beam and slab floor. When the beams are resisting
sagging moments, part of the slab acts as a compression flange and the members may be
designed as L or T-beams.
According to clause 3.4.1.5, the effective widths ๐‘๐‘“of flanged beams are:
a) For T-beams: web width +
๐‘™๐‘ง
5
โ„ or actual flange width if less
b) For L-beams: web width +
๐‘™๐‘ง
10
โ„ or actual flange width if less
Where ๐‘™๐‘งis the distance between points of zero moment (which for a continuous
beam may be taken as 0.7times the effective span)
๐พ =
๐‘€
๐‘๐‘“๐‘‘2๐‘“
๐‘๐‘ข
๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก =
๐‘€
0.87๐‘“
๐‘ฆ๐‘ง
min ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = 0.13%๐‘๐‘คโ„Ž
๐œˆ =
๐‘‰
๐‘๐‘ค๐‘‘
100๐ด๐‘ 
๐‘๐‘ค๐‘‘
Example
46
A concrete section of ๐‘๐‘ค = 250๐‘š๐‘šand ๐‘๐‘“ = 600๐‘š๐‘š, slab thickness = 150mm and beam
depth = 530mm, ๐‘“
๐‘๐‘ข = 25๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
and ๐‘“
๐‘ฆ = 425๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
. Design moment at the ultimate limit
state is 160kNm, causing sagging.
๐พ =
๐‘€
๐‘๐‘“๐‘‘2๐‘“
๐‘๐‘ข
=
160 ร— 106
600 ร— 5302 ร— 25
= 0.038
๐‘ง = 0.95๐‘‘ = 0.95 ร— 530 = 503๐‘š๐‘š
๐ท๐‘’๐‘๐‘กโ„Ž ๐‘œ๐‘“ ๐‘›๐‘’๐‘ข๐‘ก๐‘Ÿ๐‘Ž๐‘™ ๐‘Ž๐‘ฅ๐‘–๐‘  ๐‘ฅ =
๐‘‘ โˆ’ ๐‘ง
0.45
=
(530 โˆ’ 503)
0.45
= 60๐‘š๐‘š < 150๐‘š๐‘š
๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก =
๐‘€
0.87๐‘“
๐‘ฆ๐‘ง
=
160 ร— 106
0.87 ร— 425 ร— 0.95 ร— 530
= 861๐‘š๐‘š2
Therefore provide 2Y25 bars area=982mm2
Transverse steel in the flange
๐‘ก๐‘Ÿ๐‘Ž๐‘›๐‘ ๐‘ฃ๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘ ๐‘’ ๐‘ ๐‘ก๐‘’๐‘’๐‘™ ๐‘–๐‘› ๐‘กโ„Ž๐‘’ ๐‘“๐‘™๐‘Ž๐‘›๐‘”๐‘’ = 3โ„Ž๐‘“ = 3 ร— 150
= 450๐‘š๐‘š2
/๐‘š
Therefore provide Y10 bars at 150mm centres = 523mm2
DESIGN OF REINFORCED CONCRETE BEAMS
Dimensional requirements and limitations to be considered by the designer in design of beams:
a) Effective span of beams
The effective span of a simply supported beam may be taken as the lesser of
๏‚ท The distance between the centers of bearing
๏‚ท The clear distance between the supports plus the effective depth
The effective length of a cantilever is its length to the face of the support plus half its
effective depth
b) Deep beams
Deep beams having a clear span of less than twice its effective depth is not considered
in BS8110
c) Slender beams
Slender beams, where the breadth of the compression face bc is small compared with
the depth, have a tendency to fail by lateral buckling. To prevent such failure the clear
distance between lateral restraints should be limited as follows:
๏‚ท For simply supported beams to the lesser of 60bc or 250bc
2/d
๏‚ท To cantilevers restrained only at the support, to the lesser of 25bc or 100bc
2/d
d) Main reinforcement areas
47
Sufficient reinforcement must be provided in order to control cracking. Minimum area
of reinforcement should be
๏‚ท 0.24% of total concrete area when fy=250N/mm2
๏‚ท 0.13% of total concrete area when fy=460N/mm2
e) Minimum spacing of reinforcement
Minimum spacing of reinforcement should be = โ„Ž๐‘Ž๐‘”๐‘” + 5๐‘š๐‘š
f) Maximum spacing of reinforcement
When the limitation of crack widths to 0.3mm is acceptable and the cover to
reinforcement does not exceed 50mm, the maximum clear distance between adjacent
bars will be:
๏‚ท 300mm when fy=250N/mm2
๏‚ท 160mm when fy=460N/mm2
The main structural design requirements to examine in concrete beams are:
a) Bending ULS
b) Cracking SLS
c) Deflection SLS
d) Shear ULS
Steps in beam design
The steps in beam design are as follows.
(a) Preliminary size of beam
The layout and size of members are very often controlled by architectural details, and
clearances for machinery and equipment. The engineer must check whether the beams
provided are adequate, otherwise, he should resize them appropriately.
Beam dimensions required are:
1. Cover to the reinforcement
2. Breadth (b)
3. Effective depth (d)
4. Overall depth (h)
The strength of a beam is affected more by its depth than its breadth.
๐‘‚๐‘ฃ๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘Ž๐‘™๐‘™ ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘๐‘กโ„Ž = ๐‘ ๐‘๐‘Ž๐‘›/15
๐ต๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘Ž๐‘‘๐‘กโ„Ž = 0.6 ร— ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘๐‘กโ„Ž
(b) Estimation of loads
The loads include an allowance for self-weight which will be based on experience orcalculated
from the assumed dimensions for the beam. The original estimate mayrequire checking after
the final design is complete. The estimation of loads shouldalso include the weight of screed,
finish, partitions, ceiling and services if applicable.
The imposed loading depending on the type of occupancy is taken from BS6399: Part1.
(c) Analysis
48
The design loads are calculated using appropriate partial factors of safety fromBS8110: Part 1,
Table 2.1. The reactions, shears and moments are determined and theshear force and bending
moment diagrams are drawn.
(d) Design of moment reinforcement
The reinforcement is designed at the point of maximum moment, usually the centre ofthe
beam. Refer to BS8110: Part 1, section 3.4.4.
(e) Curtailment and end anchorage
A sketch of the beam in elevation is made and the cut-off point for part of the
tensionreinforcement is determined. The end anchorage for bars continuing to the end of
thebeam is set out to comply with code requirements.
(f) Design for shear
Shear stresses are checked and shear reinforcement is designed using the proceduresset out in
BS8110: Part 1, section 3.4.5. Notethat except for minor beams such as lintels all beams must
be provided with links asshear reinforcement. Small diameter bars are required in the top of
the beam to carryand anchor the links.
(g) Deflection
Deflection is checked using the rules from BS8110: Part 1, section 3.4.6.9
(h) Cracking
The maximum clear distance between bars on the tension face is checked against thelimits
given in BS8110: Part 1, clause 3.12.11.
(i) Design sketch
Design sketches of the beam with elevation and sections are completed to show all
information.
Design of Rectangular beam (singly reinforced)
Example
A beam of size 450x200mm is supported over a span of 4m. The dead load on the beam is
12kN/m and the imposed load is 15kN/m. Characteristic material strengths are ๐‘“
๐‘๐‘ข =
25๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
and ๐‘“๐‘ฆ = 460๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
Solution
๐‘‘ = โ„Ž โˆ’ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘›๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ก๐‘’ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘ฃ๐‘’๐‘Ÿ โˆ’ ๐›ท
2
โ„
Assume ๐›ท = 20๐‘š๐‘š
๐‘‘ = 450 โˆ’ 25 โˆ’ 20
2
โ„ = 415๐‘š๐‘š
1. Loading
DL
Self weight= 0.45 ร— 0.20 ร— 24 = 2.16๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š
Other = 12๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š
Total = 14.16๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š
LL
49
Live load = 15๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š
Design Load
๐‘› = 1.4๐บ๐‘˜ + 1.6๐‘„๐‘˜
= 1.4 ร— 14.16 + 1.6 ร— 15
= 43.84๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š
Maximum moment
๐‘€ =
๐‘ค๐‘™2
8
๐‘€ =
43.84 ร— 42
8
= 87.68๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š
Maximum shear
๐‘‰ =
๐‘ค๐‘™
2
๐‘‰ =
43.84 ร— 4
2
๐‘‰ = 87.68๐‘˜๐‘
2. Design
Bending
๐พ =
๐‘€
๐‘๐‘‘2๐‘“
๐‘๐‘ข
=
87.68 ร— 106
200 ร— 4152 ร— 25
= 0.101
๐‘ง = 0.87๐‘‘
Area of steel required
๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก =
๐‘€
0.87๐‘“
๐‘ฆ๐‘ง
=
87.68 ร— 106
0.87 ร— 460 ร— 0.87 ร— 415
50
= 607๐‘š๐‘š2
Minimum area of steel required
min ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = 0.13%๐‘โ„Ž
=
0.13
100
ร— 450 ร— 200
= 117๐‘š๐‘š2
Therefore try 2Y20 bars (628mm2)
Shear reinforcement
๐‘‰
๐‘š๐‘Ž๐‘ฅ = 87.68๐‘˜๐‘
Shear stress
๐œˆ =
๐‘‰
๐‘๐‘‘
=
87.68 ร— 103
200 ร— 415
= 1.06๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
0.8โˆš๐‘“
๐‘๐‘ข = 0.8โˆš25 = 4.0๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
Concrete shear stress
100๐ด๐‘ 
๐‘๐‘‘
=
100 ร— 628
200 ร— 415
= 0.76
Table 3.8 (BS 8110)
๐œˆ๐‘ = 0.572๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
๐œˆ > ๐œˆ๐‘therefore shear reinforcement is required
Table 3.7 (BS 8110)
0.5๐œˆ๐‘ = 0.5 ร— 0.572 = 0.286๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
๐œˆ๐‘ + 0.4 = 0.572 + 0.4 = 0.972๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
0.8โˆš๐‘“
๐‘๐‘ข = 0.8โˆš25 = 4.0๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
๐œˆ๐‘ + 0.4 < ๐œˆ < 0.8โˆš๐‘“๐‘๐‘ขtherefore use the formula: ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ฃ โ‰ฅ ๐‘๐‘ฃ๐‘ ๐‘ฃ(๐œˆ โˆ’ ๐œˆ๐‘)/0.95๐‘“๐‘ฆ๐‘ฃ
Therefore,
๐‘ ๐‘ฃ โ‰ค
0.95๐‘“๐‘ฆ๐‘ฃ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ฃ
๐‘๐‘ฃ(๐œˆ โˆ’ ๐œˆ๐‘)
Assume 2 legs Y8 links ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = 101๐‘š๐‘š2
, ๐‘“
๐‘ฆ๐‘ฃ = 250๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
51
๐‘ ๐‘ฃ โ‰ค
0.95 ร— 250 ร— 101
200(1.06 โˆ’ 0.572)
๐‘ ๐‘ฃ โ‰ค 246๐‘š๐‘š
Therefore provide 2 legs Y8 โ€“ 225 links
Deflection Check
Service stress
๐‘“๐‘  =
2๐‘“
๐‘ฆ๐ด๐‘  ๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ž
3๐ด๐‘  ๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘œ๐‘ฃ
=
2 ร— 460 ร— 607
3 ร— 628
= 296
Modification factor
๐‘€๐น = 0.55 +
477 โˆ’ ๐‘“
๐‘ 
120 (0.9 +
๐‘€
๐‘๐‘‘2)
= 0.55 +
477 โˆ’ 296
120(0.9 + 2.525)
= 0.99 < 2.0 โˆด ok
Permissible deflection
๐›ฟ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘š = ๐‘€๐น ร— 20
๐›ฟ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘š = 0.99 ร— 20
= 19.8๐‘š๐‘š
Actual deflection
๐›ฟ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก =
๐‘ ๐‘๐‘Ž๐‘›
๐‘’๐‘“๐‘“ ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘๐‘กโ„Ž
=
4000
415
= 9.64๐‘š๐‘š
๐›ฟ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘š > ๐›ฟ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘กtherefore the beam is adequate in deflection
Continuous rectangular beam
52
For uniformly loaded continuous beams with approximately equal spans, table 3.5 (also shown
below) can be used in analysis to find moments and shear at the supports. Other conditions for
such a beam are (clause 3.4.3):
a) Characteristic imposed load should not exceed characteristic dead load
b) Loads should be substantially uniformly distributed over three or more spans
c) Variations in span length should not exceed 15% of longest
At outer
support
Near middle of
end span
At first interior
support
At middle of
interior spans
At interior
support
Moment 0 0.09Fl -0.11Fl 0.07Fl -0.08Fl
Shear 0.45F - 0.6F - 0.55F
Example
A continuous rectangular beam of 450x200mm has a dead load of 18kN/m and live load of
12kN/m. characteristic strengths ๐‘“๐‘๐‘ข = 25๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
and ๐‘“
๐‘ฆ = 460๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
Solution
๐‘‘ = โ„Ž โˆ’ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘›๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ก๐‘’ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘ฃ๐‘’๐‘Ÿ โˆ’ ๐‘™๐‘–๐‘›๐‘˜๐‘  โˆ’ ๐›ท
2
โ„
Assume Y8 links and ๐›ท = 20๐‘š๐‘š
๐‘‘ = 450 โˆ’ 25 โˆ’ 8 โˆ’ 20
2
โ„ = 407๐‘š๐‘š
1. Loading
DL
Self weight of beam = 0.45 ร— 0.2 ร— 24 = 2.16๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š
Other = 18.00๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š
Total= 2.16 + 18.00 = 20.16๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š
LL
Live load = 12.00๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š
๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘–๐‘”๐‘› ๐‘™๐‘œ๐‘Ž๐‘‘ ๐‘› = 1.4 ร— 20.16 + 1.6 ร— 12.00
= 47.42๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š
2. Analysis
Table 3.5
a) At support
Critical moment = โˆ’0.11๐น๐‘™
๐‘€ = 0.11 ร— 47.42 ร— 4.0
= 20.86๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š
53
Critical shear = 0.6๐น
๐‘‰ = 0.6 ร— 47.42
= 28.45๐‘˜๐‘
b) At spans
Critical moment = 0.09๐น๐‘™
๐‘€ = 0.09 ร— 47.42 ร— 4.0
= 17.07๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š
3. Design
๏‚ท Bending
a) At support
๐พ =
๐‘€
๐‘๐‘‘2๐‘“
๐‘๐‘ข
=
20.86 ร— 106
200 ร— 4072 ร— 25
= 0.025
๐‘ง = 0.97๐‘‘ > 0.95๐‘‘therefore use ๐‘ง = 0.95๐‘‘
Area of steel required
๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก =
๐‘€
0.87๐‘“
๐‘ฆ๐‘ง
=
20.86 ร— 106
0.87 ร— 460 ร— 0.95 ร— 407
= 135๐‘š๐‘š2
Minimum area of steel required
๐‘š๐‘–๐‘›๐‘Ž๐‘ ๐‘ก = 0.13%๐‘โ„Ž =
0.13 ร— 200 ร— 450
100
= 227.5๐‘š๐‘š2
Therefore provide 3Y12 (339mm2)
b) At span
๐พ =
๐‘€
๐‘๐‘‘2๐‘“
๐‘๐‘ข
=
17.07 ร— 106
200 ร— 4072 ร— 25
= 0.021
๐‘ง = 0.98๐‘‘ > 0.95๐‘‘therefore use ๐‘ง = 0.95๐‘‘
Area of steel required
๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก =
๐‘€
0.87๐‘“
๐‘ฆ๐‘ง
=
17.07 ร— 106
0.87 ร— 460 ร— 0.95 ร— 407
= 110๐‘š๐‘š2
Minimum area of steel required
54
๐‘š๐‘–๐‘›๐‘Ž๐‘ ๐‘ก = 0.13%๐‘โ„Ž =
0.13 ร— 200 ร— 450
100
= 227.5๐‘š๐‘š2
Therefore try 3Y12B (339mm2)
๏‚ท Shear
๐‘‰
๐‘š๐‘Ž๐‘ฅ = 28.45๐‘˜๐‘
Shear stress
๐œˆ =
๐‘‰
๐‘๐‘‘
=
28.45 ร— 103
200 ร— 407
= 0.35๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
100๐ด๐‘ 
๐‘๐‘‘
=
100 ร— 339
200 ร— 407
= 0.42
Concrete shear stress
Table 3.8
๐œˆ๐‘ = 0.47๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
๐œˆ๐‘ > ๐œˆtherefore no shear reinforcement is required. Provide nominal reinforcement
i.e. provide 2 legs Y8 โ€“ 250 links
๏‚ท Deflection
Service stress
๐‘“
๐‘  =
2๐‘“
๐‘ฆ๐ด๐‘  ๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ž
3๐ด๐‘  ๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘œ๐‘ฃ
=
2 ร— 460 ร— 227.5
3 ร— 339
= 206
Modification factor
๐‘€๐น = 0.55 +
477 โˆ’ ๐‘“
๐‘ 
120 (0.9 +
๐‘€
๐‘๐‘‘2
)
= 0.55 +
477 โˆ’ 206
120(0.9 + 0.5190)
= 2.14 > 2.0
Therefore use MF=2.0
Permissible deflection
๐›ฟ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘š = ๐‘€๐น ร— ๐‘ ๐‘๐‘Ž๐‘›/๐‘’๐‘“๐‘“ ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘๐‘กโ„Ž ๐‘Ÿ๐‘Ž๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘œ
= 2.0 ร— 26 = 56๐‘š๐‘š
Actual deflection
55
๐›ฟ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก =
๐‘ ๐‘๐‘Ž๐‘›
๐‘’๐‘“๐‘“๐‘’๐‘๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘ฃ๐‘’ ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘๐‘กโ„Ž
=
4000
407
= 9.83๐‘š๐‘š
๐›ฟ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก < ๐›ฟ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘štherefore ok
If the conditions in clause 3.4.3 are not fulfilled, then the beam can be analyzed by method of
distribution of moments
Example
A continuous flange beam of 450x200mm has 3 spans. The end spans have a dead load of
15kN/m and live load of 12kN/m. The middle span has a dead load of 20kN/m and live load of
16kN/m. characteristic strengths ๐‘“๐‘๐‘ข = 25๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
and ๐‘“
๐‘ฆ = 460๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
Solution
๐‘‘ = โ„Ž โˆ’ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘›๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ก๐‘’ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘ฃ๐‘’๐‘Ÿ โˆ’ ๐‘™๐‘–๐‘›๐‘˜๐‘  โˆ’ ๐›ท
2
โ„
Assume Y8 links and ๐›ท = 20๐‘š๐‘š
๐‘‘ = 450 โˆ’ 25 โˆ’ 8 โˆ’ 20
2
โ„ = 407๐‘š๐‘š
a) Loading
End spans
DL
Self weight of beam = 0.45 ร— 0.2 ร— 24 = 2.16๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š
Other = 15.00๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š
Total= 2.16 + 15.00 = 17.16๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š
LL
Live load = 12.00๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š
๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘–๐‘”๐‘› ๐‘™๐‘œ๐‘Ž๐‘‘ ๐‘› = 1.4 ร— 17.16 + 1.6 ร— 12.00
= 43.22๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š
Middle span
56
DL
Self weight of beam = 0.45 ร— 0.2 ร— 24 = 2.16๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š
Other = 20.00๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š
Total= 2.16 + 20.00 = 22.16๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š
LL
Live load = 16.00๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š
๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘–๐‘”๐‘› ๐‘™๐‘œ๐‘Ž๐‘‘ ๐‘› = 1.4 ร— 22.16 + 1.6 ร— 16.00
= 56.62๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š
Stiffness factors (k)
๐‘˜ =
๐ผ
๐‘™
For the shorter span
๐‘˜๐‘  =
๐ผ
2.5
= 0.4๐ผ
For the longer span
๐‘˜๐‘™ =
๐ผ
4
= 0.25๐ผ
Distribution Factor
For the shorter span
๐ท๐น =
๐‘˜๐‘ 
๐‘˜๐‘  + ๐‘˜๐‘™
=
0.4
0.4 + 0.25
= 0.62
For the longer span
๐ท๐น =
๐‘˜๐‘™
๐‘˜๐‘  + ๐‘˜๐‘™
=
0.25
0.4 + 0.25
= 0.38
Fixed End Moments
For the shorter span
๐น๐ธ๐‘€ =
๐‘ค๐‘™2
12
=
43.22 ร— 2.52
12
= 22.51๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š
For longer span
๐น๐ธ๐‘€ =
๐‘ค๐‘™2
12
=
56.62 ร— 42
12
= 75.5๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š
57
Analysis
Taking moments about 2
2.5๐‘‰1 + 59.64 โˆ’
43.22 ร— 2.52
2
= 0
๐‘‰1 = 30.17๐‘˜๐‘
Taking moments about 1
43.22 ร— 2.52
2
+ 59.64 โˆ’ 2.5๐‘‰1โˆ’2 = 0
๐‘‰1โˆ’2 = 77.88๐‘˜๐‘
Taking moments about 3
4๐‘‰2โˆ’3 โˆ’ 59.64 + 59.64 โˆ’
56.62 ร— 42
2
= 0
๐‘‰2โˆ’3 = 113.24๐‘˜๐‘
Taking moments about 2
56.62 ร— 42
2
+ 59.64 โˆ’ 59.64 โˆ’ 4๐‘‰3โˆ’2 = 0
๐‘‰3โˆ’2 = 113.24๐‘˜๐‘
Taking moments about 4
2.5๐‘‰4โˆ’5 โˆ’
43.22 ร— 2.52
2
โˆ’ 59.64 = 0
๐‘‰4โˆ’5 = 77.88๐‘˜๐‘
Taking moments about 3
43.22 ร— 2.52
2
โˆ’ 59.64 โˆ’ 2.5๐‘‰5 = 0
๐‘‰5 = 30.17๐‘˜๐‘
58
Moments
77.88
30.17
=
2.5 โˆ’ ๐‘ฅ
๐‘ฅ
๐‘ฅ = 0.6981๐‘š
Also
113.24
113.24
=
4 โˆ’ ๐‘ฆ
๐‘ฆ
๐‘ฆ = 2๐‘š
Moment at end span
๐‘€ =
1
2
ร— 30.17 ร— 0.6981
= 10.53๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š
Moment at the middle span
๐‘€ =
1
2
ร— 113.24 ร— 2
= 113.24๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š
๐‘€๐‘œ๐‘š๐‘’๐‘›๐‘ก = โˆ’59.64 + 113.24 = 53.6๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š
59
b) Design
1. At support
Critical moment = 59.64kNm
b = 200mm
Bending
๐พ =
๐‘€
๐‘๐‘‘2๐‘“
๐‘๐‘ข
=
59.64 ร— 106
200 ร— 4072 ร— 25
= 0.072
๐‘ง = 0.91๐‘‘
Area of steel required
๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก =
๐‘€
0.87๐‘“
๐‘ฆ๐‘ง
=
59.64 ร— 106
0.87 ร— 460 ร— 0.91 ร— 407
= 402๐‘š๐‘š2
Minimum Area of steel required
min ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = 0.13%๐‘โ„Ž =
0.13
100
ร— 200 ร— 450 = 117๐‘š๐‘š2
Therefore provide 2Y16B (402mm2), 1Y12B (113mm2)
2. At span
Critical moment = 53.6kNm
๐‘๐‘“ = 200 +
0.7 ร— 4000
5
= 760๐‘š๐‘š
Bending
๐พ =
๐‘€
๐‘๐‘“๐‘‘2๐‘“
๐‘๐‘ข
=
53.6 ร— 106
760 ร— 4072 ร— 25
= 0.017
๐‘ง = 0.98๐‘‘ > 0.95๐‘‘therefore, ๐‘ง = 0.95๐‘‘
Area of Steel required
๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก =
๐‘€
0.87๐‘“๐‘ฆ๐‘ง
=
53.6 ร— 106
0.87 ร— 460 ร— 0.95 ร— 407
= 346.4๐‘š๐‘š2
Minimum Area of steel required = 117mm2
Therefore provide 2Y16B bars (402mm2)
Shear
๐‘‰
๐‘š๐‘Ž๐‘ฅ = 113.24๐‘˜๐‘
60
Shear stress
๐œˆ =
๐‘‰
๐‘๐‘‘
=
113.24 ร— 103
200 ร— 407
= 1.39๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
100๐ด๐‘ 
๐‘๐‘‘
=
100 ร— 402
200 ร— 407
= 0.49
From table 3.8, ๐‘ฃ๐‘ = 0.50๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
๐‘ฃ๐‘ < ๐‘ฃ โˆด shear reinforcement is required
Deflection Check
Service stress
๐‘“
๐‘  =
2๐‘“
๐‘ฆ๐ด๐‘  ๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ž
3๐ด๐‘  ๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘œ๐‘ฃ
=
2 ร— 460 ร— 346.4
3 ร— 402
= 264
Modification Factor
๐‘€๐น = 0.55 +
477 โˆ’ ๐‘“
๐‘ 
120 (0.9 +
๐‘€
๐‘๐‘‘2
)
= 0.55 +
477 โˆ’ 264
120(0.9 + 0.4258)
๐‘€๐น = 1.89
Permissible deflection
๐›ฟ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘š = ๐‘€๐น ร— ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘“๐‘™๐‘’๐‘๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘œ๐‘› ๐‘โ„Ž๐‘’๐‘๐‘˜
= 1.89 ร— 26 = 49.14๐‘š๐‘š
Actual deflection
๐›ฟ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก =
๐‘ ๐‘๐‘Ž๐‘›
๐‘’๐‘“๐‘“๐‘’๐‘๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘ฃ๐‘’ ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘๐‘กโ„Ž
=
4000
407
= 9.83๐‘š๐‘š
๐›ฟ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘š > ๐›ฟ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก โˆด the beam is adequate in deflection
Redoing the example above but assuming that the beams are flanged:
61
Example
A continuous flange beam of 450x200mm has a dead load of 18kN/m and live load of 12kN/m.
characteristic strengths ๐‘“๐‘๐‘ข = 25๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
and ๐‘“
๐‘ฆ = 460๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
Solution
๐‘‘ = โ„Ž โˆ’ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘›๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ก๐‘’ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘ฃ๐‘’๐‘Ÿ โˆ’ ๐‘™๐‘–๐‘›๐‘˜๐‘  โˆ’ ๐›ท
2
โ„
Assume Y8 links and ๐›ท = 20๐‘š๐‘š
๐‘‘ = 450 โˆ’ 25 โˆ’ 8 โˆ’ 20
2
โ„ = 407๐‘š๐‘š
4. Loading
DL
Self weight of beam = 0.45 ร— 0.2 ร— 24 = 2.16๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š
Other = 18.00๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š
Total= 2.16 + 18.00 = 20.16๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š
LL
Live load = 12.00๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š
๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘–๐‘”๐‘› ๐‘™๐‘œ๐‘Ž๐‘‘ ๐‘› = 1.4 ร— 20.16 + 1.6 ร— 12.00
= 47.42๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š
5. Analysis
Table 3.5
c) At support
Critical moment = โˆ’0.11๐น๐‘™
๐‘€ = 0.11 ร— 47.42 ร— 4.0
= 20.86๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š
Critical shear = 0.6๐น
๐‘‰ = 0.6 ร— 47.42
= 28.45๐‘˜๐‘
d) At spans
Critical moment = 0.09๐น๐‘™
๐‘€ = 0.09 ร— 47.42 ร— 4.0
= 17.07๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š
62
6. Design
๏‚ท Bending
a) At support
๐พ =
๐‘€
๐‘๐‘‘2๐‘“
๐‘๐‘ข
=
20.86 ร— 106
200 ร— 4072 ร— 25
= 0.025
๐‘ง = 0.97๐‘‘ > 0.95๐‘‘therefore use ๐‘ง = 0.95๐‘‘
Area of steel required
๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก =
๐‘€
0.87๐‘“
๐‘ฆ๐‘ง
=
20.86 ร— 106
0.87 ร— 460 ร— 0.95 ร— 407
= 135๐‘š๐‘š2
Minimum area of steel required
๐‘š๐‘–๐‘›๐‘Ž๐‘ ๐‘ก = 0.13%๐‘โ„Ž =
0.13 ร— 200 ร— 450
100
= 227.5๐‘š๐‘š2
Therefore provide 3Y12 (339mm2)
b) At span
๐‘๐‘“ = ๐‘๐‘ค +
0.7๐‘™๐‘ฅ
5
โ„ = 200 +
0.7 ร— 4000
5
= 760๐‘š๐‘š
๐พ =
๐‘€
๐‘๐‘“๐‘‘2๐‘“
๐‘๐‘ข
=
17.07 ร— 106
760 ร— 4072 ร— 25
= 0.005
๐‘ง = 0.99๐‘‘ > 0.95๐‘‘therefore use ๐‘ง = 0.95๐‘‘
Area of steel required
๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก =
๐‘€
0.87๐‘“
๐‘ฆ๐‘ง
=
17.07 ร— 106
0.87 ร— 460 ร— 0.95 ร— 407
= 110๐‘š๐‘š2
Minimum area of steel required
๐‘š๐‘–๐‘›๐‘Ž๐‘ ๐‘ก = 0.13%๐‘โ„Ž =
0.13 ร— 200 ร— 450
100
= 227.5๐‘š๐‘š2
Therefore try 3Y12B (339mm2)
๏‚ท Shear
๐‘‰
๐‘š๐‘Ž๐‘ฅ = 28.45๐‘˜๐‘
Shear stress
63
๐œˆ =
๐‘‰
๐‘๐‘‘
=
28.45 ร— 103
200 ร— 407
= 0.35๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
100๐ด๐‘ 
๐‘๐‘‘
=
100 ร— 339
200 ร— 407
= 0.42
Concrete shear stress
Table 3.8
๐œˆ๐‘ = 0.47๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
๐œˆ๐‘ > ๐œˆtherefore no shear reinforcement is required. Provide nominal reinforcement
i.e. provide 2 legs Y8 โ€“ 250 links
๏‚ท Deflection
Service stress
๐‘“
๐‘  =
2๐‘“
๐‘ฆ๐ด๐‘  ๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ž
3๐ด๐‘  ๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘œ๐‘ฃ
=
2 ร— 460 ร— 227.5
3 ร— 339
= 206
Modification factor
๐‘€๐น = 0.55 +
477 โˆ’ ๐‘“
๐‘ 
120 (0.9 +
๐‘€
๐‘๐‘‘2
)
= 0.55 +
477 โˆ’ 206
120(0.9 + 0.1356)
= 2.73 > 2.0
Therefore use MF=2.0
Permissible deflection
๐›ฟ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘š = ๐‘€๐น ร— ๐‘ ๐‘๐‘Ž๐‘›/๐‘’๐‘“๐‘“ ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘๐‘กโ„Ž ๐‘Ÿ๐‘Ž๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘œ
= 2.0 ร— 26 = 56๐‘š๐‘š
Actual deflection
๐›ฟ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก =
๐‘ ๐‘๐‘Ž๐‘›
๐‘’๐‘“๐‘“๐‘’๐‘๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘ฃ๐‘’ ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘๐‘กโ„Ž
=
4000
407
= 9.83๐‘š๐‘š
๐›ฟ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก < ๐›ฟ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘šthereforethe beam is adequate in deflection
64
SUMMARY ON DESIGN OF BEAMS
a) Calculate the ultimate loads, shear force and bending moment acting on the beam
b) Check the bending ULS. This will determine an adequate depth for the beam and the
area of tension reinforcement required
c) Check deflection SLS by using relevant span effective depth ratios
d) Check shear ULS and provide the relevant link reinforcement
NB: Provide anti-crack bars for beams where โ„Ž > 750๐‘š๐‘š
65
COLUMNS
Columns are structures that carry loads from the beams and the slabs down to the foundations.
They are therefore primarily compression members although they may also have to resist
bending forces due to the continuity of the structure.
Classification of columns
Reinforced concrete columns are classified as either braced or unbraced, depending on how
lateral stability is provided to the structure as a whole. A concrete framed building may be
designed to resist lateral loading, e.g. wind action in two distinct ways
a) The beam and column may be designed to act together as a rigid frame in transmitting
the lateral forces down to the foundations. In such an instance the columns are said to
be unbraced and must be designed to carry both the vertical (compressive) and lateral
(bending) loads.
b) Lateral loading may be transferred via the roof and floors to a system of bracing or shear
walls designed to transmit resulting forces down to the foundations. The columns are
then said to be braced and consequently carry only vertical loads.
Columns may further be classified as short or slender. Braced columns may therefore either be
short or slender. For a short braced column
๐‘™๐‘’๐‘ฅ
โ„Ž
< 15
And
๐‘™๐‘’๐‘ฆ
๐‘
< 15
Where
๐‘™๐‘’๐‘ฅeffective height in respect of column major axis
๐‘™๐‘’๐‘ฆeffective height in respect of column minor axis
โ„Ždepth in respect of major axis
๐‘width in respect of minor axis
Clause 3.8.1.6 โ€“ ๐‘™๐‘’๐‘ฅand ๐‘™๐‘’๐‘ฆ are influenced by the degree of fixity at each end of the column
๐‘™๐‘’๐‘ฅor ๐‘™๐‘’๐‘ฆ = ๐›ฝ๐‘™0
Types of end conditions (BS 8110 clause 3.8.1.6.2)
a) Condition 1. The end of the column is connected monolithically to beams on either side
which are at least as deep as the overall dimension of the column in the plane
considered. Where the column is connected to a foundation structure, this should be of
a form specifically designed to carry moment.
b) Condition 2. The end of the column is connected monolithically to beams or slabs on
either side which are shallower than the overall dimension of the column in the plane
considered.
66
c) Condition 3. The end of the column is connected to members which, while not
specifically designed to provide restraint to rotation of the column will, nevertheless,
provide some nominal restraint.
d) Condition 4. The end of the column is unrestrained against both lateral movement and
rotation (e.g. the free end of a cantilever column in an unbraced structure).
Table 3.19 can be use to find ๐›ฝ for braced columns
End condition at top End condition at bottom
1 2 3
1 0.75 0.80 0.90
2 0.80 0.85 0.95
3 0.90 0.95 1.00
Guidelines for design of short braced columns
a) Column cross-section
b) Main reinforcement areas
c) Minimum spacing of reinforcement
d) Maximum spacing of reinforcement
e) Lateral reinforcement
f) Compressive ULS
g) Shear ULS
h) Cracking ULS
i) Lateral deflection
67
a) Column cross-section
The greater cross-sectional dimension should not exceed four times the smaller one.
Otherwise it should be treated as a wall.
b) Main Reinforcement Areas
Adequate reinforcement should be provided in order to control cracking. Minimum area of
steel required is 0.4% of the gross cross section area. The maximum area of steel required is
6% of the gross cross section area. Arrangement of bars should be as shown below.
๐ด๐‘” โˆ’gross cross sectional area of the column
๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ โˆ’area of main longitudinal reinforcement
๐ด๐‘ โˆ’net cross sectional area of concrete: ๐ด๐‘ = ๐ด๐‘” โˆ’ ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘
68
c) Minimum Spacing of Reinforcement
BS 8110 recommends minimum bar spacing of 5mm more than the size of aggregate
d) Maximum Spacing of Reinforcement
There is no limit of maximum spacing of reinforcement. However, for practical reasons,
maximum spacing of main bars should not exceed 250mm
e) Links
Linksbe provided in columns in order to prevent lateral buckling of the longitudinal main
bars due to action of compressive loading
f) Compressive ULS
This may be divided into 3 categories
i) Short braced axially loaded columns
ii) Short braced columns supporting an approximately symmetrical arrangement of
beams
iii) Short braced columns supporting vertical loads and subjected to either uniaxial or
biaxial bending
a) Short braced axially loaded columns
When a short braced column supports a concentric compressive load or where
the eccentricity of the compressive load is nominal, it may be considered to be
axially loaded. Nominal eccentricity in this context is defined as being not greater
than 0.05 times the overall column dimension (for lateral column dimension not
greater than 400mm) or 20mm (for lateral column dimension greater than
400mm)in the plane of bending.
The ultimate axial resistance is
๐‘ = 0.4๐‘“๐‘๐‘ข๐ด๐‘ + 0.75๐ด๐‘ ๐‘๐‘“
๐‘ฆ
Where Ac is the net cross sectional area of concrete and Asc the area of the
longitudinal reinforcement
But ๐ด๐‘ = ๐ด๐‘” โˆ’ ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘
๐‘ = 0.4๐‘“
๐‘๐‘ข(๐ด๐‘” โˆ’ ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘) + 0.75๐ด๐‘ ๐‘๐‘“
๐‘ฆ
b) Short braced columns supporting an approximately symmetrical arrangement of
beams
The moments of these columns will be small due primarily to unsymmetrical
arrangements of the live load. Provided the beam spans do not differ by more
than 15% of the longer, and the loading on the beams is uniformly distributed,
the column may be designed to support the axial load only. The ultimate load
that can be supported should then be taken as
69
๐‘ = 0.35๐‘“
๐‘๐‘ข๐ด๐‘ + 0.67๐ด๐‘ ๐‘๐‘“
๐‘ฆ
Or
๐‘ = 0.35๐‘“
๐‘๐‘ข(๐ด๐‘” โˆ’ ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘) + 0.67๐ด๐‘ ๐‘๐‘“
๐‘ฆ
c) Short braced columns supporting vertical loads and subjected to either uniaxial or
biaxial bending
Columns supporting beams on adjacent side whose spans vary by more than 15%
will be subjected to uniaxial bending
Columns at the corners of buildings on the other hand are subjected to biaxial
bending. In such an instance, the column should be designed to resist bending
about both axes.
For such, design carried out for an increased moment about one axis only.
If
๐‘€๐‘ฅ
โ„Žโ€ฒ
โ‰ฅ
๐‘€๐‘ฆ
๐‘โ€ฒ
The increased moment about the x-x axis is
๐‘€โ€ฒ๐‘ฅ = ๐‘€๐‘ฅ + ๐›ฝ
โ„Žโ€ฒ
๐‘โ€ฒ
๐‘€๐‘ฆ
If
๐‘€๐‘ฅ
โ„Žโ€ฒ
<
๐‘€๐‘ฆ
๐‘โ€ฒ
The increased moment about the y-y axis is
70
๐‘€โ€ฒ๐‘ฆ = ๐‘€๐‘ฆ + ๐›ฝ
๐‘โ€ฒ
โ„Žโ€ฒ
๐‘€๐‘ฅ
Where
๐‘overall section dimension perpendicular to y-y axis
๐‘โ€ฒeffective depth perpendicular to y-y axis
โ„Žoverall section dimension perpendicular to x-x axis
โ„Žโ€ฒeffective depth perpendicular to x-x axis
๐‘€๐‘ฅbending moment about x-x axis
๐‘€๐‘ฆbending about y-y axis
๐›ฝcoefficient obtained from BS 8110 table 3.22
The area of reinforcement can then be found from the appropriate design chart in BS 8110
Part 3 using N/bh and M/bh2
g) Shear ULS
Axially loaded columns are not subjected to shear and therefore no check is necessary.
h) Cracking SLS
Since cracks are produced by flexure of the concrete, short columns that support axial loads
alone do not require checking for cracking. However, all other columns subject to bending
should be considered as beams for the purpose of examining the cracking SLS.
i) Lateral Deflection
Deflection check for short braced columns is not necessary
Examples
Example 1
A short braced column in a situation of mild exposure supports an ultimate axial load of
1000kN, the size of the column being 250mm x 250mm. Using grade 30 concrete with mild
reinforcement, calculate the size of all reinforcement required and the maximum effective
height for the column if it is to be considered as a short column.
Solution
๐‘ = 0.4๐‘“
๐‘๐‘ข(๐ด๐‘” โˆ’ ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘) + 0.75๐ด๐‘ ๐‘๐‘“
๐‘ฆ
1000 ร— 103
= 0.4 ร— 30(250 ร— 250 โˆ’ ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘) + 0.75๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ ร— 250
1000000 = 750000 โˆ’ 12๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ + 187.5๐ด๐‘ ๐‘
๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ = 1424.5๐‘š๐‘š2
Try 4 Y25 (1966mm2)
71
Links
Diameter required:
The diameter required is the greater of
a. One quarter of the diameter of the largest main bar i.e. 25/4=6.25mm
b. 6mm
The spacing is the lesser of 12 times the diameter of the smallest main bar i.e. 12x25=300mm
or the smallest cross-sectional dimension of the column i.e. 250mm
Therefore provide Y8 links at 250mm spacing
Maximum effective height
๐‘™๐‘’
โ„Ž
= 15
๐‘™๐‘’ = 15โ„Ž = 15 ร— 250 = 3750๐‘š๐‘š
Example 2
A short braced reinforced concrete column supports an approximately symmetrical
arrangement of beams which result in a total vertical load of 1500kN being applied to the
column. Assuming the percentage of steel to be 1 %, choose suitable dimensions for the column
and the diameter of the main bars. Use HY reinforcement in a square column
๐‘ = 0.35๐‘“
๐‘๐‘ข(๐ด๐‘” โˆ’ ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘) + 0.67๐ด๐‘ ๐‘๐‘“
๐‘ฆ
๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ = 0.01๐ด๐‘”
1500 ร— 103
= 0.35 ร— 35(๐ด๐‘” โˆ’ 0.01๐ด๐‘”) + 0.67 ร— 0.01๐ด๐‘” ร— 460
1500 ร— 103
= 12.25๐ด๐‘” โˆ’ 0.1225๐ด๐‘” + 3.082๐ด๐‘”
๐ด๐‘” =
1500 ร— 1000
15.21
= 98619.33๐‘š๐‘š2
Length of column sides = โˆš98619.33 = 314.04๐‘š๐‘š
Therefore provide 315 x 315mm square grade 35 concrete column
Actual ๐ด๐‘” = 315 ร— 315 = 99225๐‘š๐‘š2
๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ = 0.01 ร— 99225 = 992.25๐‘š๐‘š2
Therefore provide four 20mm diameter HY bars (1256mm2)
72
Example 3
A short braced column supporting a vertical load and subjected to biaxial bending is shown
below. If the column is formed from grade 40 concrete, determine the size of HY main
reinforcement required.
Assume 20mm diameter bars will be adopted.
โ„Žโ€ฒ
= 300 โˆ’ 30 โˆ’ 20
2
โ„ = 260๐‘š๐‘š
๐‘โ€ฒ
= 250 โˆ’ 30 โˆ’ 20
2
โ„ = 210๐‘š๐‘š
๐‘€๐‘ฅ
โ„Žโ€ฒ
=
60
260
= 0.23
๐‘€๐‘ฆ
๐‘โ€ฒ
=
35
210
= 0.17
๐‘€๐‘ฅ
โ„Žโ€ฒ
>
๐‘€๐‘ฆ
๐‘โ€ฒ
Hence use equation 40 of BS 8110
๐‘€โ€ฒ๐‘ฅ = ๐‘€๐‘ฅ + ๐›ฝ
โ„Žโ€ฒ
๐‘โ€ฒ
๐‘€๐‘ฆ
๐‘
๐‘โ„Ž๐‘“๐‘๐‘ข
=
600 ร— 103
250 ร— 300 ร— 40
= 0.2
73
From Table 3.22, ๐›ฝ = 0.77
๐‘€โ€ฒ๐‘ฅ = 60 + 0.77 ร—
260
210
ร— 35 = 93.37๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š
๐‘‘
โ„Ž
=
260
300
= 0.87 โ‰ˆ 0.85
๐‘
๐‘โ„Ž
=
600 ร— 103
250 ร— 300
= 8
๐‘€
๐‘โ„Ž2
=
93.37 ร— 106
250 ร— 3002
= 4.15
Using the chart below:
From chart,
100๐ด๐‘ ๐‘
๐‘โ„Ž
= 1.6
๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ =
1.6๐‘โ„Ž
100
=
1.6 ร— 250 ร— 300
100
= 1200๐‘š๐‘š2
Therefore provide 20mm HY bars (1256mm2)
74
NB:
BS 6399: Section 6: reduction in total imposed load
Clause 6.1 of BS 6399 stipulates that the following loads do not qualify for reduction in total imposed
floor loads
a) Loads that have been specifically determined from knowledge of the proposed use of the
structure;
b) Loads due to plant or machinery;
c) Loads due to storage.
The reductions in loading on columns are given in the table below:
Number of floors with loads qualifying for
reduction carried by member under consideration
Reduction in total distributed imposed load on all
floors carried by the member under consideration (%)
1 0
2 10
3 20
4 30
5 to 10 40
Over 10 50 max
The table below can be used to calculate the load total load at any particular floor:
Imposed Load Cumulative
Imposed Load
% reduction Reduced Load Total Load
Reduction is done on the cumulative imposed load at each level
For buildings with more than 5 storeys, it is important to consider factors of safety for
earthquake.
75
FOUNDATIONS
Foundation is the part of a superstructure that transfers and spreads loads from the structureโ€™s
columns and walls into the ground.
Types of footing
๏‚ท Pad footing
๏‚ท Combined footing
๏‚ท Strap footing
๏‚ท Strip footing
In the design of foundations, the areas of the bases in contact with the ground should be such
that the safe bearing pressures will not be exceeded. Design loadings to be to be considered
when calculating the base areas should be those that apply to serviceability limit state and they
are:
๏‚ท Dead plus imposed load = 1.0๐บ๐‘˜ + 1.0๐‘„๐‘˜
๏‚ท Dead plus wind load = 1.0๐บ๐‘˜ + 1.0๐‘Š๐‘˜
๏‚ท Dead plus imposed plus wind load= 1.0๐บ๐‘˜ + 0.8๐‘„๐‘˜ + 0.8๐‘Š๐‘˜
When the foundation is subjected to both vertical and horizontal loads, the following rule
should apply:
๐‘‰
๐‘ƒ
๐‘ฃ
+
๐ป
๐‘ƒโ„Ž
< 1.0
Where
๐‘‰ = the yield vertical load
๐ป = the horizontal load
๐‘ƒ๐‘ฃ = the allowable vertical load
๐‘ƒโ„Ž = the allowable horizontal load
The calculations to determine the structural strength of the foundations, that is the thickness of
the bases and the areas of reinforcement, should be based on the loadings and the resultant
ground pressures corresponding to the ultimate limit state
Pad footing
The principal steps in the design calculations are as follows:
1. Calculate the plan size of the footing using the permissible bearing pressure and the critical
loading arrangement for the serviceability limit state
2. Calculate the bearing pressures associated with the critical loading arrangement at the
ultimate limit state
3. Determine the minimum thickness h of the base
4. Check the thickness h for punching shear, assuming a probable value for the ultimate shear
stress
76
5. Determine the reinforcement required to resist bending
6. Make a final check of the punching shear having established the ultimate shear stress
precisely
7. Check the shear stress at the critical sections
8. Where applicable, the foundation and structure should be checked for over-all stability at
the ultimate limit state
Example
Design a pad footing to resist characteristic axial loads of 1000kN dead and 350kN imposed
from a 400mm square column with 16mm dowels. The safe bearing pressure on the soil is
200kN/m2 and the characteristic material strengths are ๐‘“
๐‘๐‘ข = 25๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
and ๐‘“
๐‘ฆ = 425๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
Solution
Loading
Assume footing self weight of 150kN.
๐‘‡๐‘œ๐‘ก๐‘Ž๐‘™ ๐ท๐ฟ = 1000 + 150 = 1150๐‘˜๐‘
a) For serviceability limit state
๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘–๐‘”๐‘› ๐‘Ž๐‘ฅ๐‘–๐‘Ž๐‘™ ๐‘™๐‘œ๐‘Ž๐‘‘ = 1.0๐บ๐‘˜ + 1.0๐‘„๐‘˜
= 1.0 ร— 1150 + 1.0 ร— 350
= 1500๐‘˜๐‘
๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ž๐‘ข๐‘–๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘‘ ๐‘๐‘Ž๐‘ ๐‘’ ๐‘Ž๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘Ž =
1500
200
= 7.5๐‘š2
โˆดProvide a base of 2.8m square, area = 7.84m2
b) For the Ultimate Limit State
๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘–๐‘”๐‘› ๐‘Ž๐‘ฅ๐‘–๐‘Ž๐‘™ ๐‘™๐‘œ๐‘Ž๐‘‘ = 1.4๐บ๐‘˜ + 1.6๐‘„๐‘˜
= 1.4 ร— 1150 + 1.6 ร— 350
= 2170๐‘˜๐‘
๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก๐‘ข๐‘Ž๐‘™ ๐‘’๐‘Ž๐‘Ÿ๐‘กโ„Ž ๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘ ๐‘ข๐‘Ÿ๐‘’ =
2170
2.82
= 277๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2
Assume a 600mm thick footing
๐‘›๐‘’๐‘ก ๐‘ข๐‘๐‘ค๐‘Ž๐‘Ÿ๐‘‘ ๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘ ๐‘ข๐‘Ÿ๐‘’ = 277 โˆ’ โ„Ž ร— 24 ร— 1.4 = 257๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2
c) Punching Shear
Assume the footing is constructed on a blinding layer of 50mm and minimum concrete
cover is 50mm
๐‘‘ = 600 โˆ’ 50 โˆ’ 20 โˆ’ 20
2
โ„ = 520๐‘š๐‘š
Shear at column face
77
๐‘ฃ =
๐‘
๐‘๐‘œ๐‘™๐‘ข๐‘š๐‘› ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘–๐‘š๐‘’๐‘ก๐‘’๐‘Ÿ ร— ๐‘‘
=
1500 ร— 103
400 ร— 4 ร— 520
= 1.80๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘–๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘๐‘Ž๐‘™ ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘–๐‘š๐‘’๐‘ก๐‘’๐‘Ÿ = 4 ร— (400 + 3๐‘‘)
= 4 ร— (400 + 3 ร— 520)
= 7840๐‘š๐‘š
๐‘Ž๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘Ž ๐‘ค๐‘–๐‘กโ„Ž๐‘–๐‘› ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘–๐‘š๐‘’๐‘ก๐‘’๐‘Ÿ = (400 + 3๐‘‘)2
= (400 + 3 ร— 520)2
= 3841600๐‘š๐‘š2
๐‘๐‘ข๐‘›๐‘โ„Ž๐‘–๐‘›๐‘” ๐‘ โ„Ž๐‘’๐‘Ž๐‘Ÿ ๐‘“๐‘œ๐‘Ÿ๐‘๐‘’ ๐‘‰ = 257(2.82
โˆ’ 3.84)
= 1028๐‘˜๐‘
Punching shear stress v
๐‘ฃ =
๐‘‰
๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘–๐‘š๐‘’๐‘ก๐‘’๐‘Ÿ ร— ๐‘‘
=
1028 ร— 103
7840 ร— 520
= 0.25๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
The ultimate shear stress is not excessive, therefore h=600mm will be suitable
d) Bending reinforcement
At the column face which is the critical section
2.8 โˆ’ 0.4
2
= 1.2๐‘š
๐‘€ = (257 ร— 2.8 ร— 1.2) ร—
1.2
2
= 518๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š
For concrete
๐‘€ = 0.156๐‘“๐‘๐‘ข๐‘๐‘‘2
78
= 0.156 ร— 25 ร— 2800 ร— 5202
ร— 10โˆ’6
= 2839๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š
๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก =
๐‘€
0.87๐‘“
๐‘ฆ๐‘ง
=
518 ร— 106
0.87 ร— 425 ร— 0.95 ร— 520
= 2836๐‘š๐‘š2
Provide 10 Y20bars at 300mm centres (3140mm2)
e) Final Check of Punching Shear
100๐ด๐‘ 
๐‘๐‘‘
=
100 ร— 3140
2800 ร— 520
= 0.22
From BS 8110, table 3.8, the ultimate shear stress ๐‘ฃ๐‘ = 0.39๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
this is greater than
punching shear stress which is ๐‘ฃ = 0.25๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
therefore a base of 600mm deep is
adequate
Critical section for shear is 1.5d from the column face as shown above
Shear
๐‘‰ = 257 ร— 2.8 ร— 0.42 = 302.2๐‘˜๐‘
79
Shear stress
๐‘ฃ =
๐‘‰
๐‘๐‘‘
=
302.2 ร— 103
2800 ร— 520
= 0.21๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
< 0.39๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
Therefore the section is adequate in shear
Combined footings
In a case whereby two columns are very close to each other such that the two pad
footings designed overlap, a combined footing is necessary. A combined footing is a
base that supports two or more columns. These may either be rectangular or
trapezoidal.
The proportions of the footing
๏‚ท Should not be too long as this will cause larger longitudinal moments on the lengths
projecting beyond the columns
๏‚ท Should not be too short as this would cause the span moments in between the
columns to be greater hence making the transverse moments to be larger
๏‚ท Thickness should be such that would ensure that shear stresses are not excessive
Process of design
The principal steps in the design calculations are as follows:
1. Calculate the plan size of the footing using the total load of both columns (for
serviceability limit state) and the permissible bearing pressure
2. Calculate the centroid of base
3. Calculate the bearing pressures associated with the critical loading arrangement at
the ultimate limit state
4. Assume the thickness h of the footing
5. Check the thickness h for punching shear
6. Determine the reinforcement required to resist bending
7. Make a final check of the punching shear having established the ultimate shear
stress precisely
8. Check the shear stress at the critical sections
Example
A combined footing supports two columns 300mm square and 400mm square with
characteristic dead and imposed loads as shown below. The safe bearing pressure is
300kN/m2 and the characteristic material strengths are ๐‘“
๐‘๐‘ข = 30๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
and ๐‘“
๐‘ฆ =
460๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
80
Assume footing self weight = 250kN
a) For Serviceability Limit State
๐‘‡๐‘œ๐‘ก๐‘Ž๐‘™ ๐‘™๐‘œ๐‘Ž๐‘‘ = 250 + 1000 + 200 + 1400 + 300 = 3150๐‘˜๐‘
Area of base required
๐ด =
๐‘‡๐‘œ๐‘ก๐‘Ž๐‘™ ๐‘™๐‘œ๐‘Ž๐‘‘
๐‘ ๐‘Ž๐‘“๐‘’ ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ž๐‘Ÿ๐‘–๐‘›๐‘” ๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘ ๐‘ข๐‘Ÿ๐‘’
=
3150
300
= 10.5๐‘š2
Try 4.6m x 2.3m base
๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก๐‘ข๐‘Ž๐‘™ ๐‘Ž๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘Ž = 4.6 ร— 2.3 = 10.58๐‘š2
b) Centroid of footing
Load on 300mm column = 1200kN
Load on 400mm column = 1700kN
Total load = 1200 + 1700 = 2900kN
The resultant load will act somewhere in between the columns. Therefore,
taking moments about the centerline of 400mm column
3 ร— 1200 = (1700 + 1200) ร— ๐‘ฅฬ…
๐‘ฅฬ… =
3 ร— 1200
(1700 + 1200)
= 1.24๐‘š
c) Bearing Pressure at the Ultimate Limit State
๐‘‡๐‘œ๐‘ก๐‘Ž๐‘™ ๐ฟ๐‘œ๐‘Ž๐‘‘ = 1.4๐บ๐‘˜ + 1.6๐‘„๐‘˜
= 1.4(1000 + 1400 + 250) + 1.6(200 + 300)
= 4510๐‘˜๐‘
๐ด๐‘๐‘ก๐‘ข๐‘Ž๐‘™ ๐‘’๐‘Ž๐‘Ÿ๐‘กโ„Ž ๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘ ๐‘ข๐‘Ÿ๐‘’ =
๐‘‡๐‘œ๐‘ก๐‘Ž๐‘™ ๐‘™๐‘œ๐‘Ž๐‘‘
๐ด๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘Ž
=
4510
10.58
= 426๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2
Assume footing thickness of 800mm
๐‘›๐‘’๐‘ก ๐‘ข๐‘๐‘ค๐‘Ž๐‘Ÿ๐‘‘ ๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘ ๐‘ข๐‘Ÿ๐‘’ = 426 โˆ’ 1.4 ร— 0.8 ร— 24
= 400๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2
81
d) Moment and Shear Force
๐‘ข๐‘‘๐‘™ = 400 ร— 2.3 = 920๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š
Point loads
1. ๐‘Š1 = 1.4 ร— 1000 + 1.6 ร— 200 = 1720๐‘˜๐‘
2. ๐‘Š2 = 1.4 ร— 1400 + 1.6 ร— 300 = 2440๐‘˜๐‘
The loading, shear force and bending moment diagram are as shown below
82
e) Shear
Punching shear cannot be checked since the critical perimeter 1.5h from the column
face lies outside the base area. Because the footing is a thick slab with bending in two
directions, the critical section for shear is taken as 1.5d from the column face
๐‘‰ = 1509 โˆ’ 400 ร— 2.3(1.5 ร— 0.74 + 0.2) = 304๐‘˜๐‘
Shear stress
๐‘ฃ =
๐‘‰
๐‘๐‘‘
=
304 ร— 103
2300 ร— 740
= 0.18๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
< 0.8โˆš๐‘“
๐‘๐‘ข
f) Bending reinforcement
Longitudinal reinforcement
Mid-span of the columns
๐‘€ = 717๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š
๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก =
๐‘€
0.87๐‘“๐‘ฆ๐‘ง
=
717 ร— 106
0.87 ร— 460 ร— 0.95 ร— 740
= 2549๐‘š๐‘š2
Therefore provide 9Y20 bars (2830mm2)
At the face of the 400mm square column
๐‘€ = 400 ร— 2.3 ร—
(1.06 โˆ’ 0.2)2
2
= 340๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š
๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก =
๐‘€
0.87๐‘“๐‘ฆ๐‘ง
=
340 ร— 106
0.87 ร— 460 ร— 0.95 ร— 740
= 1208๐‘š๐‘š2
Minimum area of steel required
min ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = 0.13%๐‘โ„Ž =
0.13
100
ร— 2300 ร— 800 = 2392๐‘š๐‘š2
Therefore provide 9Y20 bars โ€“ 270 c/c (2830mm2)
Transverse bending
๐‘€ = 400 ร—
1.152
2
= 265๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š
83
Area of steel required
๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก =
๐‘€
0.87๐‘“๐‘ฆ๐‘ง
=
265 ร— 106
0.87 ร— 460 ร— 0.95 ร— 740
= 942๐‘š๐‘š2
Minimum area of steel required
Consider 1m width
min ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = 0.13%๐‘โ„Ž =
0.13
100
ร— 1000 ร— 800 = 1040๐‘š๐‘š2
Provide Y16 at 180mm (A=1117mm2)
Strip Footing
Strip footings are provided to bear the loads transmitted by walls in the case of load bearing
walls or where a series of columns are close together.Strip footings are analyzed and designed
as inverted continuous beamssubjected to ground bearing pressure. With a thick rigid footing
and a firm soil, a linear distribution of bearing pressure is considered. If the columns are equally
spaced and equally loaded the pressure is uniformly distributed but if the loading is not
symmetrical then the base is subjected to eccentric load and the bearing pressure varies as
shown below:
The bearing pressure will not be linear when the footing is not very rigid and the soil is soft and
compressible. In these cases the bending moment diagram would be quite unlike that for a
continuous beam with firmly held supports and the moments could be quite large, particularly
if the loading is unsymmetrical.
Reinforcement is required in the bottom of the base to resist transverse bending moments in
addition to the reinforcement required for the longitudinal bending. Footings which support
heavily loaded columns often require stirrups and bent up bars to resist shearing forces.
84
Example
Design a strip footing to carry 400mm square columns equally spaced at 3.5m centres. The
columns require 16mm dowels and the characteristic loads are 1000kN dead and 350kN
imposed. The safe bearing pressure is 200kN/m2 and the characteristic material strengths are
fcu=25N/mm2 and fy=460N/mm2.
Solution
Try footing depthof 700mm. Assume self weight of footing = 40kN/m
For Serviceability limit state
๐‘ค๐‘–๐‘‘๐‘กโ„Ž ๐‘œ๐‘“ ๐‘“๐‘œ๐‘œ๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘›๐‘” =
๐‘„
๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ž๐‘Ÿ๐‘–๐‘›๐‘” ๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘ ๐‘ข๐‘Ÿ๐‘’
=
1000 + 350 + (40 ร— 3.5)
200 ร— 3.5
= 2.13๐‘š
Provide a strip of 2.2m wide
For Ultimate Limit State
๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ž๐‘Ÿ๐‘–๐‘›๐‘” ๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘ ๐‘ข๐‘Ÿ๐‘’ =
1.4(1000 + 40 ร— 3.5) + 1.6 ร— 350
2.2 ร— 3.5
= 280๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2
๐‘›๐‘’๐‘ก ๐‘ข๐‘๐‘ค๐‘Ž๐‘Ÿ๐‘‘ ๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘ ๐‘ข๐‘Ÿ๐‘’ = 280 โˆ’ 1.4 ร— 0.7 ร— 24 = 257๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2
Longitudinal reinforcement
Moment at columns (take as interior span where ๐‘€ =
๐น๐‘™
10
๐‘€ =
257 ร— 2.2 ร— 3.52
10
= 693๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š
Area of steel required
๐‘‘ = ๐‘กโ„Ž๐‘–๐‘๐‘˜๐‘›๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘  ๐‘œ๐‘“ ๐‘ ๐‘™๐‘Ž๐‘(โ„Ž) โˆ’ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘›๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ก๐‘’ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘ฃ๐‘’๐‘Ÿ โˆ’ ๐›ท
2
โ„ = 700 โˆ’ 50 โˆ’ 25 โˆ’ 25
2
โ„ = 612.5๐‘š๐‘š
๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก =
๐‘€
0.87๐‘“
๐‘ฆ๐‘ง
=
693 ร— 106
0.87 ร— 460 ร— 0.95 ร— 612.5
= 2976๐‘š๐‘š2
Minimum area of steel required
min ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = 0.13%๐‘โ„Ž =
0.13
100
ร— 2200 ร— 700 = 2002๐‘š๐‘š2
Therefore provide Y25B spaced at 150mm centres (3272mm2)
In the span where ๐‘€ =
๐น๐‘™
14
,
๐‘€ =
257 ร— 2.2 ร— 3.52
14
= 495๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š
85
Area of steel required
๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก =
๐‘€
0.87๐‘“
๐‘ฆ๐‘ง
=
495 ร— 106
0.87 ร— 460 ร— 0.95 ร— 612.5
= 2126๐‘š๐‘š2
Therefore provide Y20 top bars at 125mm centres (2513mm2)
Transverse Reinforcement
๐‘€ = 257 ร—
1.12
2
= 156๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š
Area of steel required
๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก =
๐‘€
0.87๐‘“
๐‘ฆ๐‘ง
=
156 ร— 106
0.87 ร— 460 ร— 0.95 ร— 612.5
= 670๐‘š๐‘š2
Minimum area of steel required
min ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = 0.13%๐‘โ„Ž =
0.13
100
ร— 1000 ร— 700 = 910๐‘š๐‘š2
Therefore provide Y16 โ€“ 200 (1005mm2) bottom steel
Shear
1.5d from the column face
๐‘‰ = 257 ร— 2.2 ร— (3.5 ร— 0.55 โˆ’ 1.5 ร— 0.6125 โˆ’ 0.2) = 456๐‘˜๐‘
Shear stress
๐‘ฃ =
๐‘‰
๐‘๐‘‘
=
456 ร— 103
2200 ร— 612.5
= 0.34๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
< 0.35๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
Therefore no shear reinforcement required
Raft Foundation
A raft foundation is a combined footing which covers the entire area beneath a structure and
supports all the walls and columns. This type of foundation is most appropriate and suitable
when soil pressure is low or loading is heavy, and the spread footings would cover more than
one half of the planned area. This way the raft is able to transmit the load over a wide area.
The simplest type of raft is a flat slab of uniform thickness supporting the columns. Where the
punching shears are large the columns may be provided with a pedestal at their base. The
pedestal serves a similar function to the drop panel in a flat slab floor.Other more heavily
loaded rafts require the foundation to be strengthened by beams to forma ribbed construction.
The beams may be either downstanding or upstanding.
Raft foundations normally rest on soil or rock, or if hard stratum is not available or is deep, it
may rest on piles
86
Piled Foundations
Piles are used where the soil conditions are poor and it is uneconomical to use spread footings.
There are two types of piles
1. Bearing piles โ€“ this is a pile that extends through poor stratum and its tip penetrates a
small distance into hard stratum. The load on the pile is supported by the hard stratum
2. Friction pilesโ€“this is a pile which extends through poor stratum and so bears its load
bearing capacity in the friction acting on the sides of the piles
Concrete piles may be precast and driven into the ground, or they may be the cast in situ type
which is bored or excavated.
A soil survey has to be carried out in order to determinedepth to firm soil as well as the
properties of the soil. This will help find the length of piles required.
Group piles can also be used. With these, the minimum spacing of piles should not be less than
1. The pile perimeter โ€“ for friction piles
2. Twice the least width of the pile โ€“ for end bearing piles.
Bored piles are sometimes enlarged at their base so that they have a larger bearing area
REINFORCED CONCRETE WALLS (SHEAR WALLS)
A wall is a vertical load-bearing member whose length exceeds four times its thickness.
Types of walls include
๏‚ท Reinforced concrete wall โ€“ this is a wall that has at least the minimum quantity of
reinforcement (clause 3.12.5)
๏‚ท Plain concrete wall โ€“ this is a wall that does not have any reinforcement
๏‚ท Braced wall โ€“ this is a wall where reactions to lateral forces are provided by lateral
supports such as floors and cross walls
๏‚ท An unbraced wall is a wall providing its own lateral stability such as a cantilever wall
๏‚ท Stocky wall โ€“ this is a wall where the effective height divided by the thickness, ๐‘™๐‘’/โ„Ž does
not exceed 15 for a braced wall or 10 for an unbraced wall
๏‚ท Slender wall โ€“ this is a wall other than a stocky wall
DESIGN OF REINFORCED CONCRETE WALLS
a) Minimum area of vertical reinforcement
The minimum amount of reinforcement required for a reinforced concrete wall is
100๐ด๐‘ ๐‘
๐ด๐‘๐‘
= 0.4 where ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ is the area of steel in compression and ๐ด๐‘๐‘ is the area of
concrete in compression.
87
b) Area of horizontal reinforcement
The area of horizontal reinforcement in walls where the vertical reinforcement resists
compression and does not exceed 2% is given in cl.3.12.7.4 as
๐‘“๐‘ฆ = 250๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
0.3% of concrete area
๐‘“๐‘ฆ = 460๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
0.25% of concrete area
c) Links
If compression reinforcement exceeds 2%, links must be provided through the wall
thickness (clause 3.12.7.5). Minimum links โ€“ 6mm or one-quarter of the largest
compression bar
General code provisions for design (clause 3.9.3) of reinforced walls
1. Axial Loads
Axial loads on walls are calculated by assuming that slabs and beams are simply supported
2. Effective height
For a reinforced wall that is constructed monolithically with adjacent construction,๐‘™๐‘’ should
be assessed as though the wall were a column subject to bending at right angles to the
plane of the wall.
3. Transverse moments
These are calculated using elastic analysis for continuous construction. If the construction is
simply supported the eccentricity and moment may be assessed using the procedure for a
plain wall. The eccentricity is not less than
๐‘ค๐‘Ž๐‘™๐‘™ ๐‘กโ„Ž๐‘–๐‘๐‘˜๐‘›๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘  (โ„Ž)
20
โ„ or 20mm
4. In-plane moments
Moments in the plane of single shear wall can be calculated from statics. When several
walls resist forces the proportion allocated to each wall should be in proportion to its
stiffness
Design of stocky reinforced concrete walls (clause 3.9.3.6)
a) For stocky braced reinforced walls supporting approximately symmetrical arrangement of
slabs(where the spans do not vary by more than 15%),
ULS total design load will be
๐‘›๐‘ค = 0.35๐‘“
๐‘๐‘ข๐ด๐‘ + 0.7๐ด๐‘ ๐‘๐‘“
๐‘ฆ
b) Walls supporting transverse moment and uniform axial load
88
When the only eccentricity of force derives from the transverse moments, the design axial
loadmay beassumed to be distributed uniformly along the length of the wall. The cross-
section ofthe wall should bedesigned to resist the appropriate design ultimate axial load
and transverse moment. The assumptionsmade in the analysis of beam sections apply (see
3.4.4.1).
c) Walls resisting in-plane moments and axial forces
The cross-section of the wall should be designed to resist the appropriate design ultimate
axial load andin-plane moments.
d) Walls with axial forces and significant transverse and in-plane moments
The effects should be assessed in three stages as follows.
i) In-plane. Considering only axial forces and in-plane moments, the distribution of
force along the wallis calculated by elastic analysis, assuming no tension in the
concrete (see 3.9.3.4).
ii) Transverse. The transverse moments are calculated (see 3.9.3.3).
iii) Combined. At various points along the wall, effects a) and b) are combined and
checked using theassumptions of 3.4.4.1.
Design Procedure
Design may be done by
a) Using an interaction chart
b) Assuming a uniform elastic stress distribution
c) Assuming that end zones resist moment
Elastic stress distribution
A straight wall section, including columns if desired, or a channel-shaped wall isanalyzed for
axial load and moment using the properties of the gross concrete sectionin each case. The wall
is divided into sections and each section is designed for theaverage direct load on
it.Compressive forces are resisted by concrete andreinforcement. Tensile stresses are resisted
by reinforcement only.
Assuming that end zones resist moment
Reinforcement located in zones at each end of the wall is designed to resist themoment. The
axial load is assumed to be distributed over the length of the wall.
89
Interaction chart
Bs8110 design notes
Bs8110 design notes
Bs8110 design notes
Bs8110 design notes
Bs8110 design notes
Bs8110 design notes
Bs8110 design notes
Bs8110 design notes

More Related Content

What's hot

Cable Layout, Continuous Beam & Load Balancing Method
 Cable Layout, Continuous Beam & Load Balancing Method Cable Layout, Continuous Beam & Load Balancing Method
Cable Layout, Continuous Beam & Load Balancing Method
Md Tanvir Alam
ย 
Design of two way slabs(d.d.m.)
Design of two way slabs(d.d.m.)Design of two way slabs(d.d.m.)
Design of two way slabs(d.d.m.)
Malika khalil
ย 
Structural Design
Structural DesignStructural Design
Structural Design
Vj NiroSh
ย 
Two way slab
Two way slabTwo way slab
Two way slab
Priodeep Chowdhury
ย 
Column Interaction Diagram construction
Column Interaction Diagram constructionColumn Interaction Diagram construction
Column Interaction Diagram construction
Pritesh Parmar
ย 
Design of pile cap
Design of  pile capDesign of  pile cap
Design of pile cap
Puspendu Ray
ย 
Design of steel beams
Design of steel beamsDesign of steel beams
Design of steel beams
Ir. David Puen
ย 
Lec09 Shear in RC Beams (Reinforced Concrete Design I & Prof. Abdelhamid Charif)
Lec09 Shear in RC Beams (Reinforced Concrete Design I & Prof. Abdelhamid Charif)Lec09 Shear in RC Beams (Reinforced Concrete Design I & Prof. Abdelhamid Charif)
Lec09 Shear in RC Beams (Reinforced Concrete Design I & Prof. Abdelhamid Charif)
Hossam Shafiq II
ย 
Design of Concrete Structure 1
Design of Concrete Structure 1Design of Concrete Structure 1
Design of Concrete Structure 1
SHARIQUE AHMAD
ย 
Chapter 12
Chapter 12Chapter 12
Chapter 12
Afgaab Cumar
ย 
Isolated column footing
Isolated column footingIsolated column footing
Isolated column footing
kamariya keyur
ย 
Wind Actions According To EC1
Wind Actions According To  EC1Wind Actions According To  EC1
Wind Actions According To EC1
Alessandro Palmeri
ย 
Three.hinged.arch
Three.hinged.archThree.hinged.arch
Three.hinged.arch
engr jafar
ย 
Design and Detailing of RC Deep beams as per IS 456-2000
Design and Detailing of RC Deep beams as per IS 456-2000Design and Detailing of RC Deep beams as per IS 456-2000
Design and Detailing of RC Deep beams as per IS 456-2000
VVIETCIVIL
ย 
Design of columns biaxial bending as per IS 456-2000
Design of columns  biaxial bending as per IS 456-2000Design of columns  biaxial bending as per IS 456-2000
Design of columns biaxial bending as per IS 456-2000
PraveenKumar Shanmugam
ย 
Calulation of deflection and crack width according to is 456 2000
Calulation of deflection and crack width according to is 456 2000Calulation of deflection and crack width according to is 456 2000
Calulation of deflection and crack width according to is 456 2000
Vikas Mehta
ย 
Problems on piles and deep footing
Problems on piles and deep footingProblems on piles and deep footing
Problems on piles and deep footing
Latif Hyder Wadho
ย 
Concrete beam design
Concrete beam designConcrete beam design
Concrete beam design
Dharnendra Bhavsar
ย 
Design of steel structure as per is 800(2007)
Design of steel structure as per is 800(2007)Design of steel structure as per is 800(2007)
Design of steel structure as per is 800(2007)
ahsanrabbani
ย 
Building project rc column
Building project rc columnBuilding project rc column
Building project rc column
sathananthankartheep
ย 

What's hot (20)

Cable Layout, Continuous Beam & Load Balancing Method
 Cable Layout, Continuous Beam & Load Balancing Method Cable Layout, Continuous Beam & Load Balancing Method
Cable Layout, Continuous Beam & Load Balancing Method
ย 
Design of two way slabs(d.d.m.)
Design of two way slabs(d.d.m.)Design of two way slabs(d.d.m.)
Design of two way slabs(d.d.m.)
ย 
Structural Design
Structural DesignStructural Design
Structural Design
ย 
Two way slab
Two way slabTwo way slab
Two way slab
ย 
Column Interaction Diagram construction
Column Interaction Diagram constructionColumn Interaction Diagram construction
Column Interaction Diagram construction
ย 
Design of pile cap
Design of  pile capDesign of  pile cap
Design of pile cap
ย 
Design of steel beams
Design of steel beamsDesign of steel beams
Design of steel beams
ย 
Lec09 Shear in RC Beams (Reinforced Concrete Design I & Prof. Abdelhamid Charif)
Lec09 Shear in RC Beams (Reinforced Concrete Design I & Prof. Abdelhamid Charif)Lec09 Shear in RC Beams (Reinforced Concrete Design I & Prof. Abdelhamid Charif)
Lec09 Shear in RC Beams (Reinforced Concrete Design I & Prof. Abdelhamid Charif)
ย 
Design of Concrete Structure 1
Design of Concrete Structure 1Design of Concrete Structure 1
Design of Concrete Structure 1
ย 
Chapter 12
Chapter 12Chapter 12
Chapter 12
ย 
Isolated column footing
Isolated column footingIsolated column footing
Isolated column footing
ย 
Wind Actions According To EC1
Wind Actions According To  EC1Wind Actions According To  EC1
Wind Actions According To EC1
ย 
Three.hinged.arch
Three.hinged.archThree.hinged.arch
Three.hinged.arch
ย 
Design and Detailing of RC Deep beams as per IS 456-2000
Design and Detailing of RC Deep beams as per IS 456-2000Design and Detailing of RC Deep beams as per IS 456-2000
Design and Detailing of RC Deep beams as per IS 456-2000
ย 
Design of columns biaxial bending as per IS 456-2000
Design of columns  biaxial bending as per IS 456-2000Design of columns  biaxial bending as per IS 456-2000
Design of columns biaxial bending as per IS 456-2000
ย 
Calulation of deflection and crack width according to is 456 2000
Calulation of deflection and crack width according to is 456 2000Calulation of deflection and crack width according to is 456 2000
Calulation of deflection and crack width according to is 456 2000
ย 
Problems on piles and deep footing
Problems on piles and deep footingProblems on piles and deep footing
Problems on piles and deep footing
ย 
Concrete beam design
Concrete beam designConcrete beam design
Concrete beam design
ย 
Design of steel structure as per is 800(2007)
Design of steel structure as per is 800(2007)Design of steel structure as per is 800(2007)
Design of steel structure as per is 800(2007)
ย 
Building project rc column
Building project rc columnBuilding project rc column
Building project rc column
ย 

Similar to Bs8110 design notes

Lecture 3 AP and RC MCEM.pptx
Lecture 3 AP and RC MCEM.pptxLecture 3 AP and RC MCEM.pptx
Lecture 3 AP and RC MCEM.pptx
AbdulqadeerZardari
ย 
Introduction To Structures.docx
Introduction To Structures.docxIntroduction To Structures.docx
Introduction To Structures.docx
write22
ย 
Introduction To Structures.docx
Introduction To Structures.docxIntroduction To Structures.docx
Introduction To Structures.docx
stirlingvwriters
ย 
Ce1302 design of rc elements
Ce1302 design of rc elementsCe1302 design of rc elements
Ce1302 design of rc elements
Priyabrata Behera
ย 
Task 1 Structural Design Principles Question For.pdf
Task 1 Structural Design Principles Question For.pdfTask 1 Structural Design Principles Question For.pdf
Task 1 Structural Design Principles Question For.pdf
sdfghj21
ย 
Ceng 5503 chapter i
Ceng 5503   chapter iCeng 5503   chapter i
Ceng 5503 chapter i
seyfen
ย 
Mechanism of load transfored...PRC-I
Mechanism of load transfored...PRC-IMechanism of load transfored...PRC-I
Mechanism of load transfored...PRC-I
Irfan Malik
ย 
Experimental study on strength and flexural behaviour of reinforced concrete ...
Experimental study on strength and flexural behaviour of reinforced concrete ...Experimental study on strength and flexural behaviour of reinforced concrete ...
Experimental study on strength and flexural behaviour of reinforced concrete ...
IOSR Journals
ย 
Effect of creep on composite steel concrete section
Effect of creep on composite steel concrete sectionEffect of creep on composite steel concrete section
Effect of creep on composite steel concrete section
Kamel Farid
ย 
REINFORCED CONCRETE STRUCTURE CHAPTER ONE GENERAL INTRODUCTION
REINFORCED CONCRETE STRUCTURE CHAPTER ONE GENERAL INTRODUCTIONREINFORCED CONCRETE STRUCTURE CHAPTER ONE GENERAL INTRODUCTION
REINFORCED CONCRETE STRUCTURE CHAPTER ONE GENERAL INTRODUCTION
tekalign24
ย 
IRJET- Experimental Analysis of Buckling Restrained Brace Under Cyclic Loadng
IRJET- Experimental Analysis of Buckling Restrained Brace Under Cyclic LoadngIRJET- Experimental Analysis of Buckling Restrained Brace Under Cyclic Loadng
IRJET- Experimental Analysis of Buckling Restrained Brace Under Cyclic Loadng
IRJET Journal
ย 
1-Basics of Prestressed Concrete.pdforgs
1-Basics of Prestressed Concrete.pdforgs1-Basics of Prestressed Concrete.pdforgs
1-Basics of Prestressed Concrete.pdforgs
632k18BilalAhmad
ย 
CIVL372-Lecture1.ppt
CIVL372-Lecture1.pptCIVL372-Lecture1.ppt
CIVL372-Lecture1.ppt
aptccivil
ย 
okkkkk.ppt
okkkkk.pptokkkkk.ppt
okkkkk.ppt
BhanuB11
ย 
CIVL372-Lecture1.ppt
CIVL372-Lecture1.pptCIVL372-Lecture1.ppt
CIVL372-Lecture1.ppt
ashvinparmessur
ย 
rrc
rrc rrc
RC Design_061603.pdf
RC Design_061603.pdfRC Design_061603.pdf
RC Design_061603.pdf
Peter309749
ย 
IRJET- Comparative Analysis of Moment Resisting Frames of Steel and Composit...
IRJET-	 Comparative Analysis of Moment Resisting Frames of Steel and Composit...IRJET-	 Comparative Analysis of Moment Resisting Frames of Steel and Composit...
IRJET- Comparative Analysis of Moment Resisting Frames of Steel and Composit...
IRJET Journal
ย 
presentation
presentationpresentation
presentation
BUET Khuzdar
ย 
ุชู‚ุฑูŠุฑ ูู†ูŠ -ุชุฏุนูŠู… ุงู„ู…ุจู†ู‰ ู…ุน ุงู„ุฑุณูˆู… ุถุฏ ุงู„ุฒู„ุงุฒู„.docx
ุชู‚ุฑูŠุฑ ูู†ูŠ -ุชุฏุนูŠู… ุงู„ู…ุจู†ู‰ ู…ุน ุงู„ุฑุณูˆู… ุถุฏ ุงู„ุฒู„ุงุฒู„.docxุชู‚ุฑูŠุฑ ูู†ูŠ -ุชุฏุนูŠู… ุงู„ู…ุจู†ู‰ ู…ุน ุงู„ุฑุณูˆู… ุถุฏ ุงู„ุฒู„ุงุฒู„.docx
ุชู‚ุฑูŠุฑ ูู†ูŠ -ุชุฏุนูŠู… ุงู„ู…ุจู†ู‰ ู…ุน ุงู„ุฑุณูˆู… ุถุฏ ุงู„ุฒู„ุงุฒู„.docx
Adnan Lazem
ย 

Similar to Bs8110 design notes (20)

Lecture 3 AP and RC MCEM.pptx
Lecture 3 AP and RC MCEM.pptxLecture 3 AP and RC MCEM.pptx
Lecture 3 AP and RC MCEM.pptx
ย 
Introduction To Structures.docx
Introduction To Structures.docxIntroduction To Structures.docx
Introduction To Structures.docx
ย 
Introduction To Structures.docx
Introduction To Structures.docxIntroduction To Structures.docx
Introduction To Structures.docx
ย 
Ce1302 design of rc elements
Ce1302 design of rc elementsCe1302 design of rc elements
Ce1302 design of rc elements
ย 
Task 1 Structural Design Principles Question For.pdf
Task 1 Structural Design Principles Question For.pdfTask 1 Structural Design Principles Question For.pdf
Task 1 Structural Design Principles Question For.pdf
ย 
Ceng 5503 chapter i
Ceng 5503   chapter iCeng 5503   chapter i
Ceng 5503 chapter i
ย 
Mechanism of load transfored...PRC-I
Mechanism of load transfored...PRC-IMechanism of load transfored...PRC-I
Mechanism of load transfored...PRC-I
ย 
Experimental study on strength and flexural behaviour of reinforced concrete ...
Experimental study on strength and flexural behaviour of reinforced concrete ...Experimental study on strength and flexural behaviour of reinforced concrete ...
Experimental study on strength and flexural behaviour of reinforced concrete ...
ย 
Effect of creep on composite steel concrete section
Effect of creep on composite steel concrete sectionEffect of creep on composite steel concrete section
Effect of creep on composite steel concrete section
ย 
REINFORCED CONCRETE STRUCTURE CHAPTER ONE GENERAL INTRODUCTION
REINFORCED CONCRETE STRUCTURE CHAPTER ONE GENERAL INTRODUCTIONREINFORCED CONCRETE STRUCTURE CHAPTER ONE GENERAL INTRODUCTION
REINFORCED CONCRETE STRUCTURE CHAPTER ONE GENERAL INTRODUCTION
ย 
IRJET- Experimental Analysis of Buckling Restrained Brace Under Cyclic Loadng
IRJET- Experimental Analysis of Buckling Restrained Brace Under Cyclic LoadngIRJET- Experimental Analysis of Buckling Restrained Brace Under Cyclic Loadng
IRJET- Experimental Analysis of Buckling Restrained Brace Under Cyclic Loadng
ย 
1-Basics of Prestressed Concrete.pdforgs
1-Basics of Prestressed Concrete.pdforgs1-Basics of Prestressed Concrete.pdforgs
1-Basics of Prestressed Concrete.pdforgs
ย 
CIVL372-Lecture1.ppt
CIVL372-Lecture1.pptCIVL372-Lecture1.ppt
CIVL372-Lecture1.ppt
ย 
okkkkk.ppt
okkkkk.pptokkkkk.ppt
okkkkk.ppt
ย 
CIVL372-Lecture1.ppt
CIVL372-Lecture1.pptCIVL372-Lecture1.ppt
CIVL372-Lecture1.ppt
ย 
rrc
rrc rrc
rrc
ย 
RC Design_061603.pdf
RC Design_061603.pdfRC Design_061603.pdf
RC Design_061603.pdf
ย 
IRJET- Comparative Analysis of Moment Resisting Frames of Steel and Composit...
IRJET-	 Comparative Analysis of Moment Resisting Frames of Steel and Composit...IRJET-	 Comparative Analysis of Moment Resisting Frames of Steel and Composit...
IRJET- Comparative Analysis of Moment Resisting Frames of Steel and Composit...
ย 
presentation
presentationpresentation
presentation
ย 
ุชู‚ุฑูŠุฑ ูู†ูŠ -ุชุฏุนูŠู… ุงู„ู…ุจู†ู‰ ู…ุน ุงู„ุฑุณูˆู… ุถุฏ ุงู„ุฒู„ุงุฒู„.docx
ุชู‚ุฑูŠุฑ ูู†ูŠ -ุชุฏุนูŠู… ุงู„ู…ุจู†ู‰ ู…ุน ุงู„ุฑุณูˆู… ุถุฏ ุงู„ุฒู„ุงุฒู„.docxุชู‚ุฑูŠุฑ ูู†ูŠ -ุชุฏุนูŠู… ุงู„ู…ุจู†ู‰ ู…ุน ุงู„ุฑุณูˆู… ุถุฏ ุงู„ุฒู„ุงุฒู„.docx
ุชู‚ุฑูŠุฑ ูู†ูŠ -ุชุฏุนูŠู… ุงู„ู…ุจู†ู‰ ู…ุน ุงู„ุฑุณูˆู… ุถุฏ ุงู„ุฒู„ุงุฒู„.docx
ย 

Recently uploaded

Literature review for prompt engineering of ChatGPT.pptx
Literature review for prompt engineering of ChatGPT.pptxLiterature review for prompt engineering of ChatGPT.pptx
Literature review for prompt engineering of ChatGPT.pptx
LokerXu2
ย 
Hot Call Girls In Bangalore โœ” 9079923931 โœ” Hi I Am Divya Vip Call Girl Servic...
Hot Call Girls In Bangalore โœ” 9079923931 โœ” Hi I Am Divya Vip Call Girl Servic...Hot Call Girls In Bangalore โœ” 9079923931 โœ” Hi I Am Divya Vip Call Girl Servic...
Hot Call Girls In Bangalore โœ” 9079923931 โœ” Hi I Am Divya Vip Call Girl Servic...
Banerescorts
ย 
An In-Depth Exploration of Natural Language Processing: Evolution, Applicatio...
An In-Depth Exploration of Natural Language Processing: Evolution, Applicatio...An In-Depth Exploration of Natural Language Processing: Evolution, Applicatio...
An In-Depth Exploration of Natural Language Processing: Evolution, Applicatio...
DharmaBanothu
ย 
This study Examines the Effectiveness of Talent Procurement through the Imple...
This study Examines the Effectiveness of Talent Procurement through the Imple...This study Examines the Effectiveness of Talent Procurement through the Imple...
This study Examines the Effectiveness of Talent Procurement through the Imple...
DharmaBanothu
ย 
Introduction to Artificial Intelligence.
Introduction to Artificial Intelligence.Introduction to Artificial Intelligence.
Introduction to Artificial Intelligence.
supriyaDicholkar1
ย 
โฃUnsatisfied Bhabhi Call Girls Surat ๐Ÿ’ฏCall Us ๐Ÿ” 7014168258 ๐Ÿ”๐Ÿ’ƒIndependent Sura...
โฃUnsatisfied Bhabhi Call Girls Surat ๐Ÿ’ฏCall Us ๐Ÿ” 7014168258 ๐Ÿ”๐Ÿ’ƒIndependent Sura...โฃUnsatisfied Bhabhi Call Girls Surat ๐Ÿ’ฏCall Us ๐Ÿ” 7014168258 ๐Ÿ”๐Ÿ’ƒIndependent Sura...
โฃUnsatisfied Bhabhi Call Girls Surat ๐Ÿ’ฏCall Us ๐Ÿ” 7014168258 ๐Ÿ”๐Ÿ’ƒIndependent Sura...
hotchicksescort
ย 
paper relate Chozhavendhan et al. 2020.pdf
paper relate Chozhavendhan et al. 2020.pdfpaper relate Chozhavendhan et al. 2020.pdf
paper relate Chozhavendhan et al. 2020.pdf
ShurooqTaib
ย 
ไธ€ๆฏ”ไธ€ๅŽŸ็‰ˆ(uoftๆฏ•ไธš่ฏไนฆ)ๅŠ ๆ‹ฟๅคงๅคšไผฆๅคšๅคงๅญฆๆฏ•ไธš่ฏๅฆ‚ไฝ•ๅŠž็†
ไธ€ๆฏ”ไธ€ๅŽŸ็‰ˆ(uoftๆฏ•ไธš่ฏไนฆ)ๅŠ ๆ‹ฟๅคงๅคšไผฆๅคšๅคงๅญฆๆฏ•ไธš่ฏๅฆ‚ไฝ•ๅŠž็†ไธ€ๆฏ”ไธ€ๅŽŸ็‰ˆ(uoftๆฏ•ไธš่ฏไนฆ)ๅŠ ๆ‹ฟๅคงๅคšไผฆๅคšๅคงๅญฆๆฏ•ไธš่ฏๅฆ‚ไฝ•ๅŠž็†
ไธ€ๆฏ”ไธ€ๅŽŸ็‰ˆ(uoftๆฏ•ไธš่ฏไนฆ)ๅŠ ๆ‹ฟๅคงๅคšไผฆๅคšๅคงๅญฆๆฏ•ไธš่ฏๅฆ‚ไฝ•ๅŠž็†
sydezfe
ย 
Update 40 models( Solar Cell ) in SPICE PARK(JUL2024)
Update 40 models( Solar Cell ) in SPICE PARK(JUL2024)Update 40 models( Solar Cell ) in SPICE PARK(JUL2024)
Update 40 models( Solar Cell ) in SPICE PARK(JUL2024)
Tsuyoshi Horigome
ย 
๐Ÿ”ฅYoung College Call Girls Chandigarh ๐Ÿ’ฏCall Us ๐Ÿ” 7737669865 ๐Ÿ”๐Ÿ’ƒIndependent Chan...
๐Ÿ”ฅYoung College Call Girls Chandigarh ๐Ÿ’ฏCall Us ๐Ÿ” 7737669865 ๐Ÿ”๐Ÿ’ƒIndependent Chan...๐Ÿ”ฅYoung College Call Girls Chandigarh ๐Ÿ’ฏCall Us ๐Ÿ” 7737669865 ๐Ÿ”๐Ÿ’ƒIndependent Chan...
๐Ÿ”ฅYoung College Call Girls Chandigarh ๐Ÿ’ฏCall Us ๐Ÿ” 7737669865 ๐Ÿ”๐Ÿ’ƒIndependent Chan...
sonamrawat5631
ย 
๐Ÿ”ฅ Hyderabad Call Girls ย ๐Ÿ‘‰ 9352988975 ๐Ÿ‘ซ High Profile Call Girls Whatsapp Numbe...
๐Ÿ”ฅ Hyderabad Call Girls ย ๐Ÿ‘‰ 9352988975 ๐Ÿ‘ซ High Profile Call Girls Whatsapp Numbe...๐Ÿ”ฅ Hyderabad Call Girls ย ๐Ÿ‘‰ 9352988975 ๐Ÿ‘ซ High Profile Call Girls Whatsapp Numbe...
๐Ÿ”ฅ Hyderabad Call Girls ย ๐Ÿ‘‰ 9352988975 ๐Ÿ‘ซ High Profile Call Girls Whatsapp Numbe...
aarusi sexy model
ย 
๐Ÿ”ฅIndependent Call Girls In Pune ๐Ÿ’ฏCall Us ๐Ÿ” 7014168258 ๐Ÿ”๐Ÿ’ƒIndependent Pune Esco...
๐Ÿ”ฅIndependent Call Girls In Pune ๐Ÿ’ฏCall Us ๐Ÿ” 7014168258 ๐Ÿ”๐Ÿ’ƒIndependent Pune Esco...๐Ÿ”ฅIndependent Call Girls In Pune ๐Ÿ’ฏCall Us ๐Ÿ” 7014168258 ๐Ÿ”๐Ÿ’ƒIndependent Pune Esco...
๐Ÿ”ฅIndependent Call Girls In Pune ๐Ÿ’ฏCall Us ๐Ÿ” 7014168258 ๐Ÿ”๐Ÿ’ƒIndependent Pune Esco...
AK47
ย 
SELENIUM CONF -PALLAVI SHARMA - 2024.pdf
SELENIUM CONF -PALLAVI SHARMA - 2024.pdfSELENIUM CONF -PALLAVI SHARMA - 2024.pdf
SELENIUM CONF -PALLAVI SHARMA - 2024.pdf
Pallavi Sharma
ย 
Cricket management system ptoject report.pdf
Cricket management system ptoject report.pdfCricket management system ptoject report.pdf
Cricket management system ptoject report.pdf
Kamal Acharya
ย 
comptia-security-sy0-701-exam-objectives-(5-0).pdf
comptia-security-sy0-701-exam-objectives-(5-0).pdfcomptia-security-sy0-701-exam-objectives-(5-0).pdf
comptia-security-sy0-701-exam-objectives-(5-0).pdf
foxlyon
ย 
Technological Innovation Management And Entrepreneurship-1.pdf
Technological Innovation Management And Entrepreneurship-1.pdfTechnological Innovation Management And Entrepreneurship-1.pdf
Technological Innovation Management And Entrepreneurship-1.pdf
tanujaharish2
ย 
Intuit CRAFT demonstration presentation for sde
Intuit CRAFT demonstration presentation for sdeIntuit CRAFT demonstration presentation for sde
Intuit CRAFT demonstration presentation for sde
ShivangMishra54
ย 
MODULE 5 BIOLOGY FOR ENGINEERS TRENDS IN BIO ENGINEERING.pptx
MODULE 5 BIOLOGY FOR ENGINEERS TRENDS IN BIO ENGINEERING.pptxMODULE 5 BIOLOGY FOR ENGINEERS TRENDS IN BIO ENGINEERING.pptx
MODULE 5 BIOLOGY FOR ENGINEERS TRENDS IN BIO ENGINEERING.pptx
NaveenNaveen726446
ย 
Asymmetrical Repulsion Magnet Motor Ratio 6-7.pdf
Asymmetrical Repulsion Magnet Motor Ratio 6-7.pdfAsymmetrical Repulsion Magnet Motor Ratio 6-7.pdf
Asymmetrical Repulsion Magnet Motor Ratio 6-7.pdf
felixwold
ย 
FUNDAMENTALS OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING.pdf
FUNDAMENTALS OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING.pdfFUNDAMENTALS OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING.pdf
FUNDAMENTALS OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING.pdf
EMERSON EDUARDO RODRIGUES
ย 

Recently uploaded (20)

Literature review for prompt engineering of ChatGPT.pptx
Literature review for prompt engineering of ChatGPT.pptxLiterature review for prompt engineering of ChatGPT.pptx
Literature review for prompt engineering of ChatGPT.pptx
ย 
Hot Call Girls In Bangalore โœ” 9079923931 โœ” Hi I Am Divya Vip Call Girl Servic...
Hot Call Girls In Bangalore โœ” 9079923931 โœ” Hi I Am Divya Vip Call Girl Servic...Hot Call Girls In Bangalore โœ” 9079923931 โœ” Hi I Am Divya Vip Call Girl Servic...
Hot Call Girls In Bangalore โœ” 9079923931 โœ” Hi I Am Divya Vip Call Girl Servic...
ย 
An In-Depth Exploration of Natural Language Processing: Evolution, Applicatio...
An In-Depth Exploration of Natural Language Processing: Evolution, Applicatio...An In-Depth Exploration of Natural Language Processing: Evolution, Applicatio...
An In-Depth Exploration of Natural Language Processing: Evolution, Applicatio...
ย 
This study Examines the Effectiveness of Talent Procurement through the Imple...
This study Examines the Effectiveness of Talent Procurement through the Imple...This study Examines the Effectiveness of Talent Procurement through the Imple...
This study Examines the Effectiveness of Talent Procurement through the Imple...
ย 
Introduction to Artificial Intelligence.
Introduction to Artificial Intelligence.Introduction to Artificial Intelligence.
Introduction to Artificial Intelligence.
ย 
โฃUnsatisfied Bhabhi Call Girls Surat ๐Ÿ’ฏCall Us ๐Ÿ” 7014168258 ๐Ÿ”๐Ÿ’ƒIndependent Sura...
โฃUnsatisfied Bhabhi Call Girls Surat ๐Ÿ’ฏCall Us ๐Ÿ” 7014168258 ๐Ÿ”๐Ÿ’ƒIndependent Sura...โฃUnsatisfied Bhabhi Call Girls Surat ๐Ÿ’ฏCall Us ๐Ÿ” 7014168258 ๐Ÿ”๐Ÿ’ƒIndependent Sura...
โฃUnsatisfied Bhabhi Call Girls Surat ๐Ÿ’ฏCall Us ๐Ÿ” 7014168258 ๐Ÿ”๐Ÿ’ƒIndependent Sura...
ย 
paper relate Chozhavendhan et al. 2020.pdf
paper relate Chozhavendhan et al. 2020.pdfpaper relate Chozhavendhan et al. 2020.pdf
paper relate Chozhavendhan et al. 2020.pdf
ย 
ไธ€ๆฏ”ไธ€ๅŽŸ็‰ˆ(uoftๆฏ•ไธš่ฏไนฆ)ๅŠ ๆ‹ฟๅคงๅคšไผฆๅคšๅคงๅญฆๆฏ•ไธš่ฏๅฆ‚ไฝ•ๅŠž็†
ไธ€ๆฏ”ไธ€ๅŽŸ็‰ˆ(uoftๆฏ•ไธš่ฏไนฆ)ๅŠ ๆ‹ฟๅคงๅคšไผฆๅคšๅคงๅญฆๆฏ•ไธš่ฏๅฆ‚ไฝ•ๅŠž็†ไธ€ๆฏ”ไธ€ๅŽŸ็‰ˆ(uoftๆฏ•ไธš่ฏไนฆ)ๅŠ ๆ‹ฟๅคงๅคšไผฆๅคšๅคงๅญฆๆฏ•ไธš่ฏๅฆ‚ไฝ•ๅŠž็†
ไธ€ๆฏ”ไธ€ๅŽŸ็‰ˆ(uoftๆฏ•ไธš่ฏไนฆ)ๅŠ ๆ‹ฟๅคงๅคšไผฆๅคšๅคงๅญฆๆฏ•ไธš่ฏๅฆ‚ไฝ•ๅŠž็†
ย 
Update 40 models( Solar Cell ) in SPICE PARK(JUL2024)
Update 40 models( Solar Cell ) in SPICE PARK(JUL2024)Update 40 models( Solar Cell ) in SPICE PARK(JUL2024)
Update 40 models( Solar Cell ) in SPICE PARK(JUL2024)
ย 
๐Ÿ”ฅYoung College Call Girls Chandigarh ๐Ÿ’ฏCall Us ๐Ÿ” 7737669865 ๐Ÿ”๐Ÿ’ƒIndependent Chan...
๐Ÿ”ฅYoung College Call Girls Chandigarh ๐Ÿ’ฏCall Us ๐Ÿ” 7737669865 ๐Ÿ”๐Ÿ’ƒIndependent Chan...๐Ÿ”ฅYoung College Call Girls Chandigarh ๐Ÿ’ฏCall Us ๐Ÿ” 7737669865 ๐Ÿ”๐Ÿ’ƒIndependent Chan...
๐Ÿ”ฅYoung College Call Girls Chandigarh ๐Ÿ’ฏCall Us ๐Ÿ” 7737669865 ๐Ÿ”๐Ÿ’ƒIndependent Chan...
ย 
๐Ÿ”ฅ Hyderabad Call Girls ย ๐Ÿ‘‰ 9352988975 ๐Ÿ‘ซ High Profile Call Girls Whatsapp Numbe...
๐Ÿ”ฅ Hyderabad Call Girls ย ๐Ÿ‘‰ 9352988975 ๐Ÿ‘ซ High Profile Call Girls Whatsapp Numbe...๐Ÿ”ฅ Hyderabad Call Girls ย ๐Ÿ‘‰ 9352988975 ๐Ÿ‘ซ High Profile Call Girls Whatsapp Numbe...
๐Ÿ”ฅ Hyderabad Call Girls ย ๐Ÿ‘‰ 9352988975 ๐Ÿ‘ซ High Profile Call Girls Whatsapp Numbe...
ย 
๐Ÿ”ฅIndependent Call Girls In Pune ๐Ÿ’ฏCall Us ๐Ÿ” 7014168258 ๐Ÿ”๐Ÿ’ƒIndependent Pune Esco...
๐Ÿ”ฅIndependent Call Girls In Pune ๐Ÿ’ฏCall Us ๐Ÿ” 7014168258 ๐Ÿ”๐Ÿ’ƒIndependent Pune Esco...๐Ÿ”ฅIndependent Call Girls In Pune ๐Ÿ’ฏCall Us ๐Ÿ” 7014168258 ๐Ÿ”๐Ÿ’ƒIndependent Pune Esco...
๐Ÿ”ฅIndependent Call Girls In Pune ๐Ÿ’ฏCall Us ๐Ÿ” 7014168258 ๐Ÿ”๐Ÿ’ƒIndependent Pune Esco...
ย 
SELENIUM CONF -PALLAVI SHARMA - 2024.pdf
SELENIUM CONF -PALLAVI SHARMA - 2024.pdfSELENIUM CONF -PALLAVI SHARMA - 2024.pdf
SELENIUM CONF -PALLAVI SHARMA - 2024.pdf
ย 
Cricket management system ptoject report.pdf
Cricket management system ptoject report.pdfCricket management system ptoject report.pdf
Cricket management system ptoject report.pdf
ย 
comptia-security-sy0-701-exam-objectives-(5-0).pdf
comptia-security-sy0-701-exam-objectives-(5-0).pdfcomptia-security-sy0-701-exam-objectives-(5-0).pdf
comptia-security-sy0-701-exam-objectives-(5-0).pdf
ย 
Technological Innovation Management And Entrepreneurship-1.pdf
Technological Innovation Management And Entrepreneurship-1.pdfTechnological Innovation Management And Entrepreneurship-1.pdf
Technological Innovation Management And Entrepreneurship-1.pdf
ย 
Intuit CRAFT demonstration presentation for sde
Intuit CRAFT demonstration presentation for sdeIntuit CRAFT demonstration presentation for sde
Intuit CRAFT demonstration presentation for sde
ย 
MODULE 5 BIOLOGY FOR ENGINEERS TRENDS IN BIO ENGINEERING.pptx
MODULE 5 BIOLOGY FOR ENGINEERS TRENDS IN BIO ENGINEERING.pptxMODULE 5 BIOLOGY FOR ENGINEERS TRENDS IN BIO ENGINEERING.pptx
MODULE 5 BIOLOGY FOR ENGINEERS TRENDS IN BIO ENGINEERING.pptx
ย 
Asymmetrical Repulsion Magnet Motor Ratio 6-7.pdf
Asymmetrical Repulsion Magnet Motor Ratio 6-7.pdfAsymmetrical Repulsion Magnet Motor Ratio 6-7.pdf
Asymmetrical Repulsion Magnet Motor Ratio 6-7.pdf
ย 
FUNDAMENTALS OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING.pdf
FUNDAMENTALS OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING.pdfFUNDAMENTALS OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING.pdf
FUNDAMENTALS OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING.pdf
ย 

Bs8110 design notes

  • 1. 2011 REINFORCED CONCRETE DESIGN FOR CIVIL ENGINEERS & CONSTRUCTION MANAGERS
  • 2. 2 STRUCTURAL DESIGN Aim of Design BS 8110 states that the aim of design is: To come up with a structure which is cost effective but will, at the same time, perform satisfactorily throughout its intended life; that is the structure will, with an appropriate degree of safety, be able to sustain all the loads and deformation of normal construction and use and that it will have adequate durability and resistance to the effects of fire and misuse. REINFORCED CONCRETE Reinforced concrete is a composite material of steel bars embedded in a hardened concrete matrix. Reinforced concrete is a strong durable building material that can be formed into many varied shapes and sizes. Its utility and versatility is achieved by combining the best properties of steel and concrete. Concrete Steel Strength in tension Poor Good Strength in compression Good Good but slender bars will buckle Strength in shear Fair Good Durability Good Corrodes if unprotected Fire resistance Good Poor โ€“ loses its strength rapidly at high temperatures Steel and concrete, as is seen in the table above are complementary to each other. When combined, steel will provide the mix with tensile strength and some shear strength while concrete will provide compressive strength, durability as well as good fire resistance. Composite Action The tensile strength of concrete is only 10% its compressive strength. In design, therefore, it is assumed that concrete does not resist any tensile forces;it is the reinforcement that carries these tensile forces and these are transferred by bond between the interface of the two materials. If the bond is not adequate, the reinforcement will slip and there would be no composite action. It is assumed that in a composite section there is perfect bond such that the strain in the reinforcement is identical to the strain in the concrete surrounding it.
  • 3. 3 ๏‚ท Concrete Concrete is composed of ๏‚ท Cement ๏‚ท Fine aggregate ๏‚ท Coarse aggregate ๏‚ท Water ๏‚ท Additives (optional) Concrete stress-strain relations A typical stress strain curve for concrete is as shown above. As the load is applied, the ratio of stress and stain are at first linear (up to 1/3 of the ultimate compressive strength) i.e., concrete behaves like an elastic material with full recovery of displacement if load is removed.The curve eventually becomes not linear because at this range concrete behaves like a plastic. If the load is removed from concrete at this stage, there wonโ€™t be full recovery of the material. A little deformation will also remain. The ultimate strain for concrete is 0.0035.
  • 4. 4 ๏‚ท Steel Stress strain Relationship There are two types of steel bars: ๏‚ท Mild steel ๏‚ท High yield steel Mild steel behaves like an elastic material up the yield point where any further increase in strain will not increase the stress. Beyond the yield point, steel becomes plastic and the strain increases rapidly to the ultimate value. High yield steel on the other hand shows a more gradual change from the elastic stage to the plastic stage Flexural Failure This may happen in due to: a) Under-reinforcement โ€“tension failure b) Over-reinforcement โ€“ compression failure Tension Failure If the steel content of the section is small (an under-reinforced concrete section), the steel will reach its yield strength before the concrete reaches its maximum capacity. The flexural strength of the section is reached when the strain in the extreme compression fiber of the concrete is approximately 0.003, Fig. 1.10. With further increase in strain, the moment of resistance reduces, and the bottom of the member will fail by lagging and cracking. This type of failure, because it is initiated by yielding of the tension steel, could be referred to as "tension failure." The section then fails in a "ductile" fashion with adequate visible warning before failure.
  • 5. 5 FIGURE 1.10. Single reinforced section when the tension failure is reached. Compression Failure If the steel content of the section is large (an over-reinforced concrete section), the concrete may reach its maximum capacity before the steel yields. Again the flexural strength of the section is reached when the strain in the extreme compression fiber of the concrete is approximately 0.003, Fig. 1.11. The section then fails suddenly in a "brittle" fashion by crushing of the compression part if the concrete is not confined.There may be little visible warning of failure. FIGURE 1.11. Single reinforced section when the compression failure is reached. These two behaviors show the importance of ensuring that the right amount of reinforcement is provided in order to ensure that failure of one steel or concrete does not start before the other. Failure of both steel and concrete should occur at the same time. This is known as balanced failure.
  • 6. 6 Balanced Failure At a particular steel content, the steel reaches the yield strength and the concrete reaches its extreme fiber compression strain of 0.003, simultaneously, Fig. 1.12. FIGURE 1.12. Single reinforced section when the balanced failure is reached. FIGURE 1.13. Strain profiles at the flexural strength of a section.
  • 7. 7 DESIGN METHODS Design of an engineering structure must ensure that 1. The structure remains safe under the worst loading condition 2. During normal working conditions the deformation of the members does not detract from the appearance, durability or performance of the structure Methods of design that have so far been formulated are: 1. Permissible stress method โ€“ ultimate strengths of the materials are divided by a factor of safety to provide design stresses which are usually within the elastic range Shortcomings โ€“ because it is based on elastic stress distribution, it is not applicable to concrete since it is semi โ€“ plastic โ€“ it is unsafe when dealing with stability of structures subject to overturning forces 2. The load factor methodโ€“where working loads are multiplied by a factor of safety Shortcomings โ€“ it cannot directly account for variability of materials due to material stresses It cannot be used to calculate the deflections and cracking at working conditions. 3. Limit state methodโ€“multiplies the working loads by partial factors of safety factors and also divides the materialsโ€™ ultimate strengths by further partial factors of safety. It overcomes the limitations of the previous methods by use of factors of safety as well as materialsโ€™ factors of safety making it possible to vary them so that they may be used in the plastic range for ultimate state or in the elastic range under working loads. Limit States The criterion for safe design is that the structure should not become unfit for use. i.e. it should not reach a limit state during its design life. Types of limit states ๏‚ท Ultimate limit state ๏‚ท Serviceability limit state a) Ultimate limit state This requires that the structure be able to withstand the forces for which it has been designed b) Serviceability limit state Most important SLS are i) Deflection ii) Cracking
  • 8. 8 Others are i) Durability ii) Excessive vibration iii) Fatigue iv) Fire resistance v) Special circumstances Characteristic Material Strengths Characteristic strength is taken as the value below which it is unlikely that more than 5% of the results will fall. This is given by ๐‘“๐‘˜ = ๐‘“ ๐‘š โˆ’ 1.64๐‘  Where ๐‘“๐‘˜ = ๐‘โ„Ž๐‘Ž๐‘Ÿ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘–๐‘ ๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘ ๐‘ ๐‘ก๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘›๐‘”๐‘กโ„Ž, ๐‘“ ๐‘š = ๐‘š๐‘’๐‘Ž๐‘› ๐‘ ๐‘ก๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘›๐‘”๐‘กโ„Ž, ๐‘  = ๐‘ ๐‘ก๐‘Ž๐‘›๐‘‘๐‘Ž๐‘Ÿ๐‘‘ ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘ฃ๐‘–๐‘Ž๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘œ๐‘› Characteristic Loads Characteristic loads (service loads) are the actual loads that the structure is designed to carry. It should be possible to assess loads statistically ๐‘โ„Ž๐‘Ž๐‘Ÿ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘–๐‘ ๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘ ๐‘™๐‘œ๐‘Ž๐‘‘ = ๐‘š๐‘’๐‘Ž๐‘› ๐‘™๐‘œ๐‘Ž๐‘‘ ยฑ 1.64 ๐‘ ๐‘ก๐‘Ž๐‘›๐‘‘๐‘Ž๐‘Ÿ๐‘‘ ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘ฃ๐‘–๐‘Ž๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘œ๐‘› Partial Factors of Safety for Materials ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘–๐‘”๐‘› ๐‘ ๐‘ก๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘›๐‘”๐‘กโ„Ž = ๐‘โ„Ž๐‘Ž๐‘Ÿ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘–๐‘ ๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘ ๐‘ ๐‘ก๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘›๐‘”๐‘กโ„Ž (๐‘“๐‘˜) ๐‘๐‘Ž๐‘Ÿ๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘Ž๐‘™ ๐‘“๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก๐‘œ๐‘Ÿ ๐‘œ๐‘“ ๐‘ ๐‘Ž๐‘“๐‘’๐‘ก๐‘ฆ (๐›พ๐‘š) Factors considered when selecting a suitable value for ๐›พ๐‘š ๏‚ท The strength of the material in an actual member ๏‚ท The severity of the limit state being considered. Partial Factors of Safety for Loads (๐œธ๐’‡) ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘–๐‘”๐‘› ๐‘™๐‘œ๐‘Ž๐‘‘ = ๐‘โ„Ž๐‘Ž๐‘Ÿ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘–๐‘ ๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘ ๐‘™๐‘œ๐‘Ž๐‘‘ ร— ๐‘๐‘Ž๐‘Ÿ๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘Ž๐‘™ ๐‘“๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก๐‘œ๐‘Ÿ ๐‘œ๐‘“ ๐‘ ๐‘Ž๐‘“๐‘’๐‘ก๐‘ฆ (๐›พ๐‘“) Structural Elements in Reinforced Concrete They are the following (in the order of their listing i.e. top to bottom) ๏‚ท Roof ๏‚ท Beams โ€“ horizontal members carrying lateral loads ๏‚ท Slab โ€“ horizontal panel plate elements carrying lateral loads
  • 9. 9 ๏‚ท Column โ€“ vertical members carrying primarily axial load but generally subjected to axial load and moment ๏‚ท Walls โ€“ vertical plate elements resisting lateral or in-plane loads ๏‚ท Bases and Foundations โ€“ pads or strips supported directly on the ground that spread the loads from the columns or walls so that they can be supported by the ground without excessive settlement The process of Reinforced Concrete Design 1. Receive Architectural Drawings 2. Establish the use of the structure and use BS 6399 to establish live load 3. Establish / determine the support structure and the respective structural elements 4. Design starts from top to bottom Key observations in Reinforced Concrete Design The following are the fundamentals to be observed before design is effected: ๏‚ท Effective support system ๏‚ท Critical spans ๏‚ท Loading โ€“ ensure all dead loads and live loads are loaded on the respective elements ๏‚ท Deflection SLABS Slabs are reinforced concrete plate elements forming floors and roofs in buildings which normally carry uniformly distributed loads. They are primarily flexural members Types of Slabs ๏‚ท One way spanning slab ๏‚ท Two way spanning slab ๏‚ท Ribbed slab ๏‚ท Flat slab Types of support ๏‚ท Fixed ๏‚ท Simply supported
  • 10. 10 GENERAL SLAB DESIGN PROCEDURE Slab Sizing Slab sizing majorly depends on the support conditions (cantilever, simply supported, continuous) For continuous, ๐‘กโ„Ž๐‘–๐‘๐‘˜๐‘›๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘  ๐‘œ๐‘“ ๐‘ ๐‘™๐‘Ž๐‘ = ๐‘™๐‘ฅ 36 + ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘›๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ก๐‘’ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘ฃ๐‘’๐‘Ÿ + ๐›ท 2 โ„ For simply supported, ๐‘กโ„Ž๐‘–๐‘๐‘˜๐‘›๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘  ๐‘œ๐‘“ ๐‘ ๐‘™๐‘Ž๐‘ = ๐‘™๐‘ฅ 26 + ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘›๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ก๐‘’ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘ฃ๐‘’๐‘Ÿ + ๐›ท 2 โ„ For cantilever, ๐‘กโ„Ž๐‘–๐‘๐‘˜๐‘›๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘  ๐‘œ๐‘“ ๐‘ ๐‘™๐‘Ž๐‘ = ๐‘™๐‘ฅ 10 + ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘›๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ก๐‘’ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘ฃ๐‘’๐‘Ÿ + ๐›ท 2 โ„ The table below is a summary of can be used Slab type Initial sizing Deflection Check Simply Supported 36 26 Continuous 26 20 Cantilever 10 7 The most suitable concrete cover depends on exposure conditions (table 3.3 of BS 8110) as well as the aggregate size. The minimum concrete thickness should be โ„Ž๐‘Ž๐‘”๐‘” + 5๐‘š๐‘š Loading The following loads may be used in design: ๏‚ท Characteristic dead load ๐บ๐‘˜ i.e. the weight of the structure complete with finishes, fixtures and partitions ๏‚ท Characteristic imposed load ๐‘„๐‘˜ The design load is calculated by multiplying the dead and live loads with appropriate partial factors of safety (table 2.1). ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘–๐‘”๐‘› ๐‘™๐‘œ๐‘Ž๐‘‘ (๐‘›) = ๐›พ๐‘“๐บ๐‘˜ + ๐›พ๐‘“๐‘„๐‘˜ In most cases the ๐›พ๐‘“ for dead load is 1.4 while ๐›พ๐‘“ for live load is 1.6. However, this is subject to confirmation from the table 2.1 of BS8110. ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘–๐‘”๐‘› ๐‘™๐‘œ๐‘Ž๐‘‘ (๐‘›) = 1.4๐บ๐‘˜ + 1.6๐‘„๐‘˜
  • 11. 11 Spanning Mode and analysis This can be calculated by finding the ratio between the longer side to the shorter one of the span i.e. ๐‘™๐‘ฆ ๐‘™๐‘ฅ . If this ratio is less than 2.0, then this implies that the load is spanning in both directions. If the ratio is greater than 2.0, then the slab is one way spanning. For two-way spanning slabs, the value of ๐‘™๐‘ฆ ๐‘™๐‘ฅ are used to determine coefficients used to calculate moments according to BS 8110 tables 3.13, 3.14 and 3.15. For simply supported (Table 3.13) ๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฅ = ๐›ผ๐‘ ๐‘ฅ๐‘›๐‘™๐‘ฅ 2 ๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฆ = ๐›ผ๐‘ ๐‘ฆ๐‘›๐‘™๐‘ฅ 2 For restrained slab (Table 3.14) ๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฅ = ๐›ฝ๐‘ ๐‘ฅ๐‘›๐‘™๐‘ฅ 2 ๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฆ = ๐›ฝ๐‘ ๐‘ฆ๐‘›๐‘™๐‘ฅ 2 Bending ๐พ = ๐‘€ ๐‘๐‘‘2๐‘“ ๐‘๐‘ข ๐พ < 0.156 Note: For continuous slabs b is assumed to be 1m width of slab at the spans. However, at the supports, b is ๐‘ = 0.15๐‘™ ๐‘‘ = ๐‘กโ„Ž๐‘–๐‘๐‘˜๐‘›๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘  ๐‘œ๐‘“ ๐‘ ๐‘™๐‘Ž๐‘(โ„Ž) โˆ’ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘›๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ก๐‘’ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘ฃ๐‘’๐‘Ÿ โˆ’ ๐‘‘๐‘–๐‘Ž๐‘š๐‘’๐‘ก๐‘’๐‘Ÿ ๐‘œ๐‘“ ๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘–๐‘›๐‘“๐‘œ๐‘Ÿ๐‘๐‘’๐‘š๐‘’๐‘›๐‘ก 2 If ๐พ > 0.156, compression steel is required ๐‘ง = ๐‘‘ (0.5 + โˆš0.25 โˆ’ ๐พ 0.9 ) ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = ๐‘€ 0.87๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ๐‘ง ๐‘š๐‘–๐‘› ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = 0.13%๐‘โ„Ž The main steel will be in the direction of the span and the distribution steel will be in the transverse direction. ๐‘š๐‘–๐‘› ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก can also be used to obtain the reinforcement for the distribution steel.
  • 12. 12 Shear in Slabs Design shear stress at any cross section ๐œˆ = ๐‘‰ ๐‘๐‘‘ ๐œˆ should be less than 0.8โˆš๐‘“๐‘๐‘ข Concrete shear stress 100๐ด๐‘  ๐‘๐‘‘ Therefore, the concrete shear stress ๐œˆ๐‘ will be obtained from table 3.8. If ๐œˆ > ๐œˆ๐‘, shear reinforcement is required. if ๐œˆ < ๐œˆ๐‘ shear reinforcement is not required. If ๐œˆ๐‘ < ๐œˆ < (๐œˆ๐‘ + 0.4), area of reinforcement will be ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ฃ โ‰ฅ 0.4๐‘๐‘ ๐‘ฃ 0.95๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ๐‘ฃ โ„ If (๐œˆ + 0.4) < ๐œˆ < 0.8โˆš๐‘“๐‘๐‘ข area of reinforcement will be ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ฃ โ‰ฅ ๐‘๐‘ ๐‘ฃ(๐œˆ โˆ’ ๐œˆ๐‘) 0.95๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ๐‘ฃ โ„ In most cases however, shear reinforcement of slabs is not required. Deflection Service stress (BS 8110, Table 3.10) ๐‘“ ๐‘  = 2๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ๐ด๐‘  ๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ž 3๐ด๐‘  ๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘œ๐‘ฃ ร— 1 ๐›ฝ However, ๐›ฝ = 1 since there is no redistribution of moments Modification factor ๐‘€๐น = 0.55 + (477 โˆ’ ๐‘“ ๐‘ ) 120(0.9 + ๐‘€ ๐‘๐‘‘2 ) โ‰ค 2.0 Permissible deflection ๐›ฟ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘š = ๐‘€๐น ร— ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘“๐‘™๐‘’๐‘๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘œ๐‘› ๐‘โ„Ž๐‘’๐‘๐‘˜ Where the value for deflection check can be obtained from table 3.9 corresponding to the support conditions Actual deflection
  • 13. 13 ๐›ฟ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก = ๐‘ ๐‘๐‘Ž๐‘› ๐‘’๐‘“๐‘“๐‘’๐‘๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘ฃ๐‘’ ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘๐‘กโ„Ž Actual deflection should be less than the permissible deflection. Otherwise increase the thickness of the slab SLAB DESIGN 1. ONE WAY SPANNING SLAB A one way slab is one in which the ratio of the longer length to the shorter one is greater than 2. Effective span of the slab is taken as a) The center to center distance between the bearings or b) The clear distance between supports plus the effective depth of the slab Example: Simply Supported Slab Slab size =7.0 x 3m Live Load = 3.0KN/m2 Finishes and ceiling = 2.0kN/m2 Characteristic material strengths ๐‘“๐‘๐‘ข = 25๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 and ๐‘“๐‘ฆ = 460๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 Basic span-eff depth ratio = 20(BS 8110 table 3.9) Mild exposure condition; Aggregate size = 20mm Solution: ๐‘™๐‘ฆ ๐‘™๐‘ฅ โ„ = 7.0 3.0 โ„ = 2.33
  • 14. 14 Since 2.33>2.0, the slab is one way spanning as shown above. NB: the slab spans in the shorter direction ๐‘กโ„Ž๐‘–๐‘๐‘˜๐‘›๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘  ๐‘œ๐‘“ ๐‘ ๐‘™๐‘Ž๐‘ = ๐‘™๐‘ฅ 26 + ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘ฃ๐‘’๐‘Ÿ + ๐›ท 2 โ„ Assume ฮฆ=10mm = 3000 26 + 25 + 10 2 โ„ = 145.4๐‘š๐‘š Therefore, use 150mm thick slab Effective depth d ๐‘‘ = ๐‘กโ„Ž๐‘–๐‘๐‘˜๐‘›๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘  ๐‘œ๐‘“ ๐‘ ๐‘™๐‘Ž๐‘(โ„Ž) โˆ’ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘›๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ก๐‘’ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘ฃ๐‘’๐‘Ÿ โˆ’ ๐›ท 2 โ„ ๐‘‘ = 150 โˆ’ 25 โˆ’ 10 2 โ„ = 120 Loading DL Self weight of slab= โ„Ž ร— ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘›๐‘ ๐‘–๐‘ก๐‘ฆ ๐‘œ๐‘“ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘›๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ก๐‘’ = 0.15 ร— 24 = 3.6๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2 Finishes and partitions = 2.0๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2 Total Dead Load = 3.6 + 2.0 = 5.6๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2 LL 1.0kN/m2 Design Load ๐‘› = 1.4๐บ๐‘˜ + 1.6๐‘„๐‘˜ = 1.4(5.6) + 1.6(1.0) = 9.44๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2 Bending For 1m width, slab, udl = 9.44kN/m
  • 15. 15 ๐‘€ = ๐‘ค๐‘™2 8 = 9.44 ร— 32 8 = 10.62๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š ๐พ = ๐‘€ ๐‘๐‘‘2๐‘“๐‘๐‘ข = 10.62 ร— 106 1000 ร— 1202 ร— 25 = 0.03 ๐‘ง = 125 (0.5 + โˆš0.25 โˆ’ 0.03 0.9 ) = 0.97๐‘‘ 0.97๐‘‘ > 0.95๐‘‘therefore๐‘ง = 0.95๐‘‘ = 0.95 ร— 120 = 116.4๐‘š๐‘š Area of steel required ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = ๐‘€ 0.87๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ๐‘ง = 10.62 ร— 106 0.87 ร— 460 ร— 116.4 = 228๐‘š๐‘š2 Minimum area of steel required min ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = 0.13%๐‘โ„Ž = 0.13 100 ร— 1000 ร— 150 = 195๐‘š๐‘š2 Therefore provide Y8-200B1/B2 c/c (251mm2) Deflection Check Service stress ๐‘“๐‘  = 2 ร— 460 ร— 228 3 ร— 251 = 279 Modification Factor ๐‘€๐น = 0.55 + (477 โˆ’ 279) 120(0.9 + 0.7375) = 1.56 Permissible deflection ๐›ฟ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘š = 1.56 ร— ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘“๐‘™๐‘’๐‘๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘œ๐‘› ๐‘โ„Ž๐‘’๐‘๐‘˜ Table 3.9: for simply supported slab, deflection check (basic span-eff depth ratio) = 20 ๐›ฟ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘š = 1.56 ร— 20 = 31.2๐‘š๐‘š Actual deflection ๐›ฟ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก = ๐‘ ๐‘๐‘Ž๐‘› ๐‘’๐‘“๐‘“ ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘๐‘กโ„Ž = 3000 120 = 25๐‘š๐‘š ๐›ฟ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก < ๐›ฟ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘šTherefore slab is adequate in deflection Shear Maximum shear
  • 16. 16 ๐‘‰ ๐‘š๐‘Ž๐‘ฅ = ๐‘ค๐‘™ 2 = 9.44 ร— 3 2 = 14.16๐‘˜๐‘ Shear stress ๐‘ฃ = ๐‘‰ ๐‘๐‘‘ = 14.16 ร— 103 1000 ร— 120 = 0.12๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 Concrete shear stress 100๐ด๐‘  ๐‘๐‘‘ = 100 ร— 251 1000 ร— 120 = 0.21 From table 3.8 ๐‘ฃ๐‘ = 0.38๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 ๐‘ฃ๐‘ > ๐‘ฃ therefore slab is adequate in shear. No shear reinforcement is required 2. CONTINUOUS ONE WAY SLAB Analysis for a one way spanning continuous slab is done using Table 3.12 of BS 8110:1997. A continuous slab will require bottom reinforcement as well as top reinforcement at the supports owing to the fact that they bear moments. According to Table 3.9, the span-eff depth ratio for a continuous slab is 26. Example For a one way spanning continuous slab Finishes and partitions = 2.0kN/m2 Live load = 3.0kN/m2 Characteristic material strengths: ๐‘“ ๐‘๐‘ข = 25๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 and ๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ = 460๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 Concrete density = 24kN/m2 Mild cover condition Thickness of slab ๐‘กโ„Ž๐‘–๐‘๐‘˜๐‘›๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘  ๐‘œ๐‘“ ๐‘ ๐‘™๐‘Ž๐‘ = 4500 36 + 25 + 10 2 โ„ = 155 Therefore use 175mm thick slab Effective depth ๐‘‘ = 175 โˆ’ 25 โˆ’ 10 2 โ„ = 145๐‘š๐‘š Loading DL
  • 17. 17 self-weight of slab = 0.175 ร— 24 = 4.2๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2 Finishes = 2.0๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2 Total Dead Load = 4.2 + 2.0 = 6.2๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2 LL Live load = 3.0๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2 ๐ท๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘–๐‘”๐‘› ๐ฟ๐‘œ๐‘Ž๐‘‘ = 1.4๐บ๐‘˜ + 1.6๐‘„๐‘˜ ๐ท๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘–๐‘”๐‘› ๐ฟ๐‘œ๐‘Ž๐‘‘ = 1.4 ร— 6.2 + 1.6 ร— 3.0 = ๐Ÿ๐Ÿ‘. ๐Ÿ’๐Ÿ–๐’Œ๐‘ต/๐’Ž๐Ÿ ๐ท๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘–๐‘”๐‘› ๐ฟ๐‘œ๐‘Ž๐‘‘ = 13.48 ร— 4.5 = ๐Ÿ”๐ŸŽ. ๐Ÿ”๐Ÿ”๐’Œ๐‘ต ๐’‘๐’†๐’“ ๐’Ž๐’†๐’•๐’“๐’† ๐’˜๐’Š๐’…๐’•๐’‰ Analysis Moments (BS 8110: table 3.12) 1. At Supports Critical Moment at first interior support ๐‘€ = โˆ’0.086๐น๐‘™ ๐‘€ = โˆ’0.086 ร— 60.66 ร— 4.5 ๐‘€ = โˆ’23.48๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š 2. At Spans Critical moment at near middle of end span ๐‘€ = 0.075๐น๐‘™ ๐‘€ = 0.075 ร— 60.66 ร— 4.5 ๐‘€ = 20.47๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š Design 1. At Support Bending ๐‘ = 2 ร— 0.15๐‘™ = 0.3๐‘™ = 0.3 ร— 4.5 = 1.35๐‘š Clause 3.4.4.4 ๐พ = ๐‘€ ๐‘๐‘‘2๐‘“ ๐‘๐‘ข ๐พ = 23.48 ร— 106 1350 ร— 1452 ร— 25 = 0.033 ๐‘ง = ๐‘‘ {0.5 + โˆš(0.25 โˆ’ ๐พ 0.9 )} ๐‘ง = ๐‘‘ {0.5 + โˆš0.25 โˆ’ 0.033 0.9 }
  • 18. 18 ๐‘ง = 0.96๐‘‘ > 0.95๐‘‘ Therefore use ๐‘ง = 0.95๐‘‘ Area of steel required ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = ๐‘€ 0.87๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ๐‘ง = 23.48 ร— 106 0.87 ร— 460 ร— 0.95 ร— 145 ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = 426๐‘š๐‘š2 Minimum Area of steel required min ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = 0.13%๐‘โ„Ž = 0.13 100 ร— 1000 ร— 175 = 227.5๐‘š๐‘š2 Therefore provide Y10-175T1 (449mm2) and Y8-200T2 (251mm2) 2. At Span Critical moment = 20.47kN/m2 Bending ๐พ = ๐‘€ ๐‘๐‘‘2๐‘“ ๐‘๐‘ข ๐พ = 20.47 ร— 106 1000 ร— 1452 ร— 25 ๐พ = 0.039 ๐‘ง = ๐‘‘ {0.5 + โˆš(0.25 โˆ’ ๐พ 0.9 )} ๐‘ง = ๐‘‘ {0.5 + โˆš0.25 โˆ’ 0.039 0.9 } ๐‘ง = 0.95๐‘‘ Area of Steel required ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = ๐‘€ 0.87๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ๐‘ง = 20.47 ร— 106 0.87 ร— 460 ร— 0.95 ร— 145 = 371๐‘š๐‘š2
  • 19. 19 min Ast = 227.5mm2 Therefore Try Y10-200B1 (393mm2) and Y10-250B2 (314mm2) Deflection Check Service Stress ๐‘“๐‘  = 2๐‘“๐‘ฆ๐ด๐‘  ๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ž 3๐ด๐‘  ๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘œ๐‘ฃ ๐‘“ ๐‘  = 2 ร— 460 ร— 371 3 ร— 393 = 296 Modification Factor ๐‘€๐น = 0.55 + (477 โˆ’ ๐‘“๐‘ ) 120(0.9 + ๐‘€ ๐‘๐‘‘2) โ‰ค 2.0 = 0.55 + 477 โˆ’ 296 120(0.9 + 0.975) ๐‘€๐น = 1.35 < 2.0 therefore ok Permissible deflection For continuous slab, basic span-effective depth ratio according to table 3.9 is 26 ๐›ฟ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘š = 1.35 ร— 26 = 35.1๐‘š๐‘š Actual deflection ๐›ฟ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก = ๐‘ ๐‘๐‘Ž๐‘› ๐‘’๐‘“๐‘“ ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘๐‘กโ„Ž = 4500 145 = 31.03๐‘š๐‘š ๐›ฟ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก < ๐›ฟ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘štherefore slab is adequate in deflection Shear Maximum shear ๐‘‰ ๐‘š๐‘Ž๐‘ฅ = 0.6๐น = 0.6 ร— 60.66 = 36.40๐‘˜๐‘ Shear stress ๐‘ฃ = ๐‘‰ ๐‘๐‘‘ = 36.40 ร— 103 1000 ร— 145 = 0.25๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 Concrete shear stress
  • 20. 20 100๐ด๐‘  ๐‘๐‘‘ = 100 ร— 393 1000 ร— 145 = 0.27 From table 3.8, ๐‘ฃ๐‘ = 0.41๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 Since ๐‘ฃ๐‘ > ๐‘ฃ no shear reinforcement is required 3. TWO WAY SPANNING SLAB When a slab is supported on all four of its sides, it effectively spans in both directions. And so reinforcement on both directions has to be obtained. If the slab is square and the restraints similar, then the load will span equally in both directions. If the slab is rectangular then more than half the load will span in the shorter direction. Moments in each direction of span are generally calculated using coefficients in BS 8110 table 3.13 or 3.14 depending on the support system. Areas of reinforcement to resist moments are determined independently for each direction. The span effective depth ratios are based on the shorter span and the percentage of reinforcement in that direction a) Simply Supported Slab Spanning in Two Directions A slab simply supported on its four sides will deflect about both axes under load and the corners will tend to lift and curl up from the supports, causing torsional moments. When no provision has been made to prevent this lifting or to resist the torsion then the moment coefficients of table 3.13 may be used and maximum moment given by: ๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฅ = ๐›ผ๐‘ ๐‘ฅ๐‘›๐‘™๐‘ฅ 2 ๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฆ = ๐›ผ๐‘ ๐‘ฆ๐‘›๐‘™๐‘ฅ 2 Where๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฅand ๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฆ are moments at mid-span on strips of unit width with spans ๐‘™๐‘ฆ and ๐‘™๐‘ฅ The area of reinforcement in the direction ๐‘™๐‘ฅ and ๐‘™๐‘ฆ respectively are ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ฅ = ๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฅ 0.87๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ๐‘ง And ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ฆ = ๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฆ 0.87๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ๐‘ง Example Design a simply supported reinforced concrete slab shown below. Finishes and partitions = 2.0kN/m2 Live load = 3.5kN/m2
  • 21. 21 Mild exposure conditions (therefore concrete cover = 25mm) Solution Slab sizing Condition โ€“ simply supported Assume bar diameters of 10mm ๐‘กโ„Ž๐‘–๐‘๐‘˜๐‘›๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘  ๐‘œ๐‘“ ๐‘ ๐‘™๐‘Ž๐‘ = ๐‘™๐‘ฅ 26 + ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘›๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ก๐‘’ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘ฃ๐‘’๐‘Ÿ + ๐›ท 2 โ„ = 3000 26 + 25 + 10 2 โ„ = 145.4๐‘š๐‘š Adopt 150mm slab ๐‘‘ = ๐‘กโ„Ž๐‘–๐‘๐‘˜๐‘›๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘  ๐‘œ๐‘“ ๐‘ ๐‘™๐‘Ž๐‘(โ„Ž) โˆ’ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘›๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ก๐‘’ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘ฃ๐‘’๐‘Ÿ โˆ’ ๐›ท 2 โ„ ๐‘‘ = 150 โˆ’ 25 โˆ’ 10 2 โ„ = 120๐‘š๐‘š Loading DL Self weight of slab = 0.15 ร— 24 = 3.6๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2 Finishes and partitions = 2.0๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2 Total Dead Load = 3.6 + 2.0 = 5.6๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2 LL = 3.5๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2 Design Load
  • 22. 22 ๐‘› = 1.4๐บ๐‘˜ + 1.6๐‘„๐‘˜ = 1.4 ร— 5.6 + 1.6 ร— 3.5 = 13.44๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2 Analysis ๐‘™๐‘ฆ ๐‘™๐‘ฅ โ„ = 4.5 3 โ„ = 1.5 < 2.0 therefore two way spanning For simply supported beam, use table 3.13 (also shown below) in analysis ๐‘™๐‘ฆ ๐‘™๐‘ฅ โ„ 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.75 2.0 ๐›ผ๐‘ ๐‘ฅ 0.062 0.074 0.084 0.093 0.099 0.104 0.113 0.118 ๐›ผ๐‘ ๐‘ฆ 0.062 0.061 0.059 0.055 0.051 0.046 0.037 0.029 Clause 3.5.3.3 ๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฅ = ๐›ผ๐‘ ๐‘ฅ๐‘›๐‘™๐‘ฅ 2 ๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฆ = ๐›ผ๐‘ ๐‘ฆ๐‘›๐‘™๐‘ฅ 2 Therefore, ๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฅ = 0.104 ร— 13.44 ร— 3.02 = 12.58๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š ๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฆ = 0.046 ร— 13.44 ร— 3.02 = 5.56๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š Design In the x direction Bending Consider 1m width of slab ๐พ = ๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฅ ๐‘๐‘‘2๐‘“ ๐‘๐‘ข = 12.58 ร— 106 1000 ร— 1202 ร— 25 = 0.035 ๐‘ง = 0.96๐‘‘ > 0.95๐‘‘ therefore use ๐‘ง = 0.95๐‘‘ Area of steel required ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = ๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฅ 0.87๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ๐‘ง = 12.58 ร— 106 0.87 ร— 460 ร— 0.95 ร— 120 = 276๐‘š๐‘š2 Minimum area of steel required min ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = 0.13%๐‘โ„Ž = 0.13 100 ร— 1000 ร— 150 = 195๐‘š๐‘š2 Therefore provide Y10-250B1 (314mm2) and Y8-250B2 (201mm2)
  • 23. 23 Deflection Check Service stress ๐‘“๐‘  = 2๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ๐ด๐‘  ๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ž 3๐ด๐‘  ๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘œ๐‘ฃ = 2 ร— 460 ร— 276 3 ร— 314 = 270 Modification Factor ๐‘€๐น = 0.55 + 477 โˆ’ ๐‘“ ๐‘  120 (0.9 + ๐‘€ ๐‘๐‘‘2 ) = 0.55 + 477 โˆ’ 270 120(0.9 + 0.8736) ๐‘€๐น = 1.52 < 2.0 โˆด ๐‘œ๐‘˜ Permissible deflection For simply supported slab, basic span-effective depth ratio according to table 3.9 is 20 ๐›ฟ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘š = 1.52 ร— 20 = 30.4๐‘š๐‘š Actual deflection ๐›ฟ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก = ๐‘ ๐‘๐‘Ž๐‘› ๐‘’๐‘“๐‘“ ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘๐‘กโ„Ž = 3000 120 = 25.0๐‘š๐‘š ๐›ฟ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก < ๐›ฟ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘štherefore slab is adequate in deflection b) Restrained Slab Spanning in Two directions When slabs have fixity at the supports and reinforcement is added to resist torsion and to prevent the corners of the slab from lifting then the maximum moments per unit width are given by ๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฅ = ๐›ฝ๐‘ ๐‘ฅ๐‘›๐‘™๐‘ฅ 2 ๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฆ = ๐›ฝ๐‘ ๐‘ฆ๐‘›๐‘™๐‘ฅ 2 The values - ๐›ฝ๐‘ ๐‘ฅ and ๐›ฝ๐‘ ๐‘ฆare obtained as per table 3.14 of BS8110 The slab is divided into middle and edge strips as shown below Once the moments and shear have been obtained, design is done as in the previous example
  • 24. 24 Example (Continuous 2 way spanning slab) Consider the corner panel shown below. The panel has a dead load of 4kN/m2 and a live load of 2.75kN/m2. Design the slab Solution Slab sizing For a continuous slab, ๐‘กโ„Ž๐‘–๐‘๐‘˜๐‘›๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘  ๐‘œ๐‘“ ๐‘ ๐‘™๐‘Ž๐‘ = ๐‘™๐‘ฅ 36 + ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘ฃ๐‘’๐‘Ÿ + ๐›ท 2 โ„ = 4000 36 + 25 + 10 2 = 141.11๐‘š๐‘š Therefore try 150mm slab Assume bar diameter of 12mm ๐‘‘ = ๐‘กโ„Ž๐‘–๐‘๐‘˜๐‘›๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘  ๐‘œ๐‘“ ๐‘ ๐‘™๐‘Ž๐‘(โ„Ž) โˆ’ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘›๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ก๐‘’ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘ฃ๐‘’๐‘Ÿ โˆ’ ๐›ท 2 โ„ = 150 โˆ’ 25 โˆ’ 10 2 โ„ = 120๐‘š๐‘š Loading DL Self weight of slab = 0.175 ร— 24 = 4.2๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2
  • 25. 25 Other load = 4.0๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2 Total load = 4.2 + 4.0 = 8.2๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2 LL Live load = 2.75๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2 Design load ๐‘› = 1.4๐บ๐‘˜ + 1.6๐‘„๐‘˜ = 1.4 ร— 8.2 + 1.6 ร— 2.75 = 15.88๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2 Analysis ๐‘™๐‘ฆ ๐‘™๐‘ฅ = 4.8 4.0 = 1.2 Using table 3.14 Condition: 2 adjacent edges discontinuous 1. At support Short span ๐›ฝ๐‘ ๐‘ฅ = 0.063 ๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฅ = ๐›ฝ๐‘ ๐‘ฅ๐‘›๐‘™๐‘ฅ 2 = 0.063 ร— 15.88 ร— 42 = 16.01๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š Long span ๐›ฝ๐‘ ๐‘ฆ = 0.045 ๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฆ = ๐›ฝ๐‘ ๐‘ฆ๐‘›๐‘™๐‘ฅ 2 = 0.045 ร— 15.88 ร— 42 = 11.43๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š Critical Moment = 16.01kNm 2. At span Short span ๐›ฝ๐‘ ๐‘ฅ = 0.047 ๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฅ = ๐›ฝ๐‘ ๐‘ฅ๐‘›๐‘™๐‘ฅ 2 = 0.047 ร— 15.88 ร— 42 = 11.94๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š Long span ๐›ฝ๐‘ ๐‘ฆ = 0.034 ๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฆ = ๐›ฝ๐‘ ๐‘ฆ๐‘›๐‘™๐‘ฅ 2 = 0.034 ร— 15.88 ร— 42 = 8.64๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š Critical Moment = 11.94kNm
  • 26. 26 Design 1. At support Bending (clause 3.4.4.4) ๐‘ = 2 ร— 0.15๐‘™ = 0.3 ร— 4.0 = 1.2๐‘š In x direction ๐พ = ๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฅ ๐‘๐‘‘2๐‘“ ๐‘๐‘ข = 16.01 ร— 106 1200 ร— 1202 ร— 25 = 0.037 ๐‘ง = 0.95๐‘‘ Area of steel required ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = ๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฅ 0.87๐‘“๐‘ฆ๐‘ง = 16.01 ร— 106 0.87 ร— 460 ร— 0.95 ร— 120 = 351๐‘š๐‘š2 Minimum area of steel required min ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = 0.13%๐‘โ„Ž = 0.13 100 ร— 1000 ร— 150 = 195๐‘š๐‘š2 Try Y10-200T1 (393mm2) In y direction M=11.43kNm ๐พ = ๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฆ ๐‘๐‘‘2๐‘“ ๐‘๐‘ข = 11.43 ร— 106 1200 ร— 1202 ร— 25 = 0.028 ๐‘ง = 0.97๐‘‘ > 0.95๐‘‘ therefore ๐‘ง = 0.95๐‘‘ Area of steel required ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = ๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฆ 0.87๐‘“๐‘ฆ๐‘ง = 11.43 ร— 106 0.87 ร— 460 ร— 0.95 ร— 120 = 250๐‘š๐‘š2 min ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = 0.13%๐‘โ„Ž = 0.13 100 ร— 1000 ร— 150 = 195๐‘š๐‘š2 Therefore provide Y8-200T2 (251mm2) 2. At span In the x direction 11.94kNm ๐พ = ๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฅ ๐‘๐‘‘2๐‘“ ๐‘๐‘ข = 11.94 ร— 106 1000 ร— 1202 ร— 25 = 0.033
  • 27. 27 ๐‘ง = 0.96๐‘‘ > 0.95๐‘‘ therefore ๐‘ง = 0.95๐‘‘ Area of steel required ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = ๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฅ 0.87๐‘“๐‘ฆ๐‘ง = 11.94 ร— 106 0.87 ร— 460 ร— 0.95 ร— 120 = 262๐‘š๐‘š2 Minimum area of steel required min ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = 0.13%๐‘โ„Ž = 0.13 100 ร— 1000 ร— 150 = 195๐‘š๐‘š2 Therefore provide Y10-250B1 (314mm2) In the y direction 8.64kNm ๐พ = ๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฆ ๐‘๐‘‘2๐‘“ ๐‘๐‘ข = 8.64 ร— 106 1000 ร— 1202 ร— 25 = 0.024 ๐‘ง = 0.97๐‘‘ > 0.95๐‘‘ therefore ๐‘ง = 0.95๐‘‘ Area of steel required ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = ๐‘€๐‘ ๐‘ฆ 0.87๐‘“๐‘ฆ๐‘ง = 8.64 ร— 106 0.87 ร— 460 ร— 0.95 ร— 120 = 189๐‘š๐‘š2 Minimum area of steel required min ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = 0.13%๐‘โ„Ž = 0.13 100 ร— 1000 ร— 150 = 195๐‘š๐‘š2 Therefore provide Y8-250B2 (201mm2) Deflection Check Service stress ๐‘“๐‘  = 2๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ๐ด๐‘  ๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ž 3๐ด๐‘  ๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘œ๐‘ฃ = 2 ร— 460 ร— 262 3 ร— 314 = 256๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
  • 28. 28 Modification Factor ๐‘€๐น = 0.55 + 477 โˆ’ ๐‘“ ๐‘  120 (0.9 + ๐‘€ ๐‘๐‘‘2 ) = 0.55 + 477 โˆ’ 256 120(0.9 + 0.825) = 1.62 < 2.0 โˆด ๐‘œ๐‘˜ Permissible deflection For a continuous slab, the basic span effective depth ratio according to table 3.9 is 26 ๐›ฟ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘š = 1.62 ร— 26 = 42.12๐‘š๐‘š Actual deflection ๐›ฟ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก = ๐‘ ๐‘๐‘Ž๐‘› ๐‘’๐‘“๐‘“ ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘๐‘กโ„Ž = 4000 120 = 33.33๐‘š๐‘š ๐›ฟ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก < ๐›ฟ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘štherefore slab is adequate in deflection 4. RIBBED AND HOLLOW BLOCK FLOORS (BS 8110 โ€“ clause 3.6) Ribbed floors are made by using temporary or permanent shuttering while hollow block floors are made by using precast hollow blocks made of clay or concrete which contains light aggregate. Advantages of Hollow Block Floors ๏‚ท The principle advantage of these floors is the reduction in weight achieved by removing part of the concrete below the neutral axis and in the case of hollow blocks, replacing it with lighter material ๏‚ท Hollow Block floors are more economical for buildings which have long spans Slab thickening is provided near the supports in order to achieve greater shear strength, and if the slab is supported by a monolithic concrete beam the solid section acts as the flange of a T- section. The ribs should be checked for shear at the junction with the solid slab. Hollow blocks should be soaked in water before placing concrete in order to avoid cracking of the top concrete flange due to shrinkage
  • 29. 29 Example A ribbed floor continuous over several equal spans of 5.0m is constructed with permanent fiberglass moulds. The characteristic material strengths are ๐‘“ ๐‘๐‘ข = 25๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 and ๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ = 250๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 . Characteristic dead load = 4.5kN/m2. Characteristic live load = 2.5kN/m2 Solution Loading ๐‘ข๐‘™๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘š๐‘Ž๐‘ก๐‘’ ๐‘™๐‘œ๐‘Ž๐‘‘๐‘–๐‘›๐‘” = 0.4(1.4๐บ๐‘˜ + 1.6๐‘„๐‘˜) = 0.4(1.4 ร— 4.5 + 1.6 ร— 2.5) = 4.12๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š Ultimate load on span F ๐น = 4.12 ร— 5.0 = 20.6๐‘˜๐‘ Bending 1. At mid span: design as T-section ๐‘€ = 0.063๐น๐‘™ ๐‘€ = 0.063 ร— 20.6 ร— 5.0 = 6.49๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š ๐พ = ๐‘€ ๐‘๐‘“๐‘‘2๐‘“ ๐‘๐‘ข = 6.49 ร— 106 400 ร— 1702 ร— 25 = 0.022 ๐‘ง = 0.95๐‘‘ ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = ๐‘€ 0.87๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ๐‘ง = 6.49 ร— 106 0.87 ร— 460 ร— 0.95 ร— 170 = 100๐‘š๐‘š2 Therefore provide 2Y8B in the ribs (101mm2) 2. At support โ€“ design a rectangular section for the slab ๐‘€ = 0.063๐น๐‘™ ๐‘€ = 0.063 ร— 20.6 ร— 5.0
  • 30. 30 = 6.49๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š ๐พ = ๐‘€ ๐‘๐‘‘2๐‘“ ๐‘๐‘ข = 6.49 ร— 106 100 ร— 1702 ร— 25 = 0.090 ๐‘ง = 0.88๐‘‘ ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = ๐‘€ 0.87๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ๐‘ง = 6.49 ร— 106 0.87 ร— 460 ร— 0.88 ร— 170 = 108๐‘š๐‘š2 Therefore provide 2Y10B in the ribs (157mm2) in each 0.4m width of slab 3. At the section where the ribs terminate: this occurs 0.6m from the centre line of the support and the moment may be hogging so that the 100mm ribs must provide the concrete area required to develop the design moment. The maximum moment of resistance of the concrete ribs is ๐‘€ = 0.156๐‘“ ๐‘๐‘ข๐‘๐‘‘2 ๐‘€ = 0.156 ร— 25 ร— 100 ร— 1702 = 11.27๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š Which must be greater than the moment at this section, therefore compression steel is not required. Deflection Check At mid span 100๐ด๐‘  ๐‘๐‘‘ = 100 ร— 101 400 ร— 170 = 0.15 Table 3.11 Modification factor = 1.05 for 460N/mm2. Therefore, for 250N/mm2, MF=1.93 ๐‘๐‘ค ๐‘ = 100 400 = 0.25 < 0.3 โˆด basic span โˆ’ eff depth ratio = 20.8 Permissible deflection ๐›ฟ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘š = 1.93 ร— 20.8 = 40.14๐‘š๐‘š Actual deflection ๐›ฟ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก = ๐‘ ๐‘๐‘Ž๐‘› ๐‘’๐‘“๐‘“๐‘’๐‘๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘ฃ๐‘’ ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘๐‘กโ„Ž = 5000 170 ๐›ฟ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก = 29.4๐‘š๐‘š
  • 31. 31 Actual deflection is less than the permissible deflection. Therefore, the rib is adequate in deflection. Shear With 0.6m of slab provided at the support, maximum shear in the rib 0.6m from the support centre line will be = 0.5๐น โˆ’ 0.6 ร— 4.12 = 0.5 ร— 20.6 โˆ’ 2.5 = 7.83๐‘˜๐‘ Shear stress ๐œˆ = ๐‘‰ ๐‘๐‘‘ = 7.83 ร— 103 100 ร— 170 = 0.46๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 100๐ด๐‘  ๐‘๐‘‘ = 100 ร— 101 100 ร— 170 = 0.59 Therefore, concrete shear stress will be ๐œˆ๐‘ = 0.65๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 Therefore, the section is adequate in shear Topping reinforcement Clause 3.6.6.2 Consider 1m width of slab = 0.12 100 ร— 50 ร— 1000 = 60๐‘š๐‘š2 /๐‘š Therefore provide A65-BRC mesh topping. Ribbed slab proportions (section 3.6 BS 8110) The main requirements are: 1. The centres of ribs should not exceed 1.5m 2. The depth of ribs excluding topping should not exceed four times their average width 3. The minimum rib width should be determined by consideration of cover, bar spacing and fire resistance 4. The thickness of structural topping or flange should not be less than 50mm or one-tenth of the clear distance between ribs (Table 3.17)
  • 32. 32 Table 3.17 (BS 8110-1997) Type of slab Minimum thickness of topping (mm) Slabs with permanent blocks a) Clear distance between ribs not more than 500mm jointed in cement: sand mortar not weaker than 1:3 or 11N/mm2 b) Clear distance between ribs not more than 500mm, not jointed in cement: sand mortar c) All other slabs with permanent blocks 25 30 40 or one-tenth of clear distance between ribs, whichever is greater All slabs without permanent blocks For slabs without permanent blocks 50 or one-tenth of clear distance between ribs, whichever is greater Topping Reinforcement (Clause3.6.6.2) A light reinforcing mesh in the topping flange can give added strength and durability to the slab, particularly if there are concentrated or moving loads, or if cracking due to shrinkage or thermal movements is likely. Clause 3.6.6.2 specifies that the cross sectional area of the mesh be not less than 12% of the topping in each direction. The spacing between wires should not be greater than half the centre to centre distance between ribs. 5. FLAT SLAB DESIGN A flat slab floor is a reinforced concrete slab supported by concrete columns without the use of intermediary beams. The slab may be of constant thickness throughout or in the area of the column it may be thickened as a drop panel. The column may also be of constant section or it may be flared to form a column head or capital. The drop panels are effective in reducing the shearing stresses where the column is liable to punch through the slab, and they also provide an increased moment of resistance where the negative moments are greatest. Advantages of flat slab over slab and beam slab ๏‚ท The simplified formwork and the reduced storey heights make it more economical ๏‚ท Windows can extend up to the underside of the slab ๏‚ท There are no beams to obstruct the light and the circulation of air ๏‚ท The absence of sharp corners gives greater fire resistance as there is less danger of concrete spalling and exposing the reinforcement
  • 33. 33 (a) Slab without drop panel or column head; (b) floor with column head but no drop panel; (c) Floor with drop panel and column head General code provisions The design of slabs is covered in BS8110: Part 1, section 3.7. General requirements are given in clause 3.7.1, as follows. 1. The ratio of the longer to the shorter span should not exceed 2. 2. Design moments may be obtained by (a) Equivalent frame method (b) Simplified method (c) Finite element analysis 3. The effective dimension ๐‘™โ„Ž of the column head is taken as the lesser of (a) The actual dimension ๐‘™โ„Ž๐‘ or (b) ๐‘™โ„Ž๐‘š๐‘Ž๐‘ฅ =๐‘™๐‘+2(๐‘‘โ„Žโˆ’40) Where ๐‘™๐‘ is the column dimension measured in the same direction as๐‘™โ„Ž. For a flared head ๐‘™โ„Ž๐‘ is measured 40 mm below the slab or drop. Column head dimensions and the effective dimension for some cases are shown in BS8110: Part 1, Fig. 3.11. 4. The effective diameter of a column or column head is as follows: (a) For a column, the diameter of a circle whose area equals the area of the column (b) For a column head, the area of the column head based on the effective dimensions defined in requirement 3 The effective diameter of the column or column head must not be greater than one quarter of the shorter span framing into the column. 5. Drop panels only influence the distribution of moments if the smaller dimension of the drop is at least equal to one-third of the smaller panel dimension. Smaller drops provide resistance to punching shear. (b) (c)
  • 34. 34 6. The panel thickness is generally controlled by deflection. The thickness should not be less than 125 mm METHODS OF ANALYSIS Analysis of the slab may be done by dividing the slab into frames or by empirical analysis. (a) Frame analysis method The structure is divided longitudinally and transversely into frames consisting of columns and strips of slab. The entire frame or sub-frames can be analyzed by moment distribution. At first interior support At centre of interior span At interior support Moment -0.063Fl +0.071Fl -0.055Fl Shear 0.6F 0.5F Moments and shear forces for flat slabs for internal panels l= l1โˆ’2hc/3, effective span; l1, panel length parallel to the centre-to-centre span of the columns; hc, effective diameter of the column or column head (section 8.7.2(d)); F, total design load on the strip of slab between adjacent columns due to 1.4 times the dead load plus 1.6 times the imposed load. (b) Empirical method The empirical method is the most commonly used method of analysis Conditions to be met when using empirical analysis ๏‚ท The panels should be rectangular and of uniform thickness with at least 3 rows in both directions. Ratio of length to width should not exceed 1.33 ๏‚ท Shear walls should be provided to resist lateral forces ๏‚ท Lengths and widths of adjacent panels should not vary by more than 15%. ๏‚ท Drops should be rectangular and their length in each direction must not be less than one-third of the corresponding panel length
  • 35. 35 (c) Simplified method Moments and shears may be taken from Table 3.19 of the code for structures where lateral stability does not depend on slab-column connections. The following provisions apply: 1. Design is based on the single load case 2. The structure has at least three rows of panels of approximately equal span in the direction considered. The design moments and shears for internal panels are obtained from Table 3.19 of the code Design of internal panel and reinforcement details The slab reinforcement is designed to resist moments derived from table 3.19 and 3.20 of the code. Clause 3.7.3.1 states that for an internal panel, two-thirds of the amount of reinforcement required to resist negative moment in the column strip should be placed in a central zone of width one-half of the column strip. Example: Internal panel of flat slab floor The floor of a building constructed of flat slabs is 30 mร—24 m. The column centres are 6 m in both directions and the building is braced with shear walls. The panels are to have drops of 3 mร—3 m. The depth of the drops is 250 mm and the slab depth is 200 mm. The internal columns are 450 mm square and the column heads are 900 mm square. The loading is as follows: Dead load =self-weight+2.5 kN/m2 for screed, floor finishes, partitions and ceiling Imposed load =3.5 kN/m2 The materials are grade 30 concrete and grade 250 reinforcement. Design an internal panel next to an edge panel on two sides and show the reinforcement on a sketch.
  • 36. 36 ๐‘™โ„Ž0 = 870๐‘š๐‘š ๐‘™โ„Ž๐‘š๐‘Ž๐‘ฅ =๐‘™๐‘+2(๐‘‘โ„Žโˆ’40) ๐‘™โ„Ž๐‘š๐‘Ž๐‘ฅ = 450 + 2(600 โˆ’ 40) = 1570๐‘š๐‘š โ„Ž๐‘ = โˆš 4 ร— 8702 ๐œ‹ = 982๐‘š๐‘š โ‰ฏ 0.25 ร— 6000 = 1500๐‘š๐‘š
  • 37. 37 The effective span is ๐‘™ = 6000 โˆ’ 2 ร— 982 3 = 5345๐‘š๐‘š Design loads and moments The average load due to the weight of slabs and drops is [(9 ร— 0.25) + (27 ร— 0.2)] ร— 23.6 36 = 5.02๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2 Design load ๐‘› = 1.4๐บ๐‘˜ + 1.6๐‘„๐‘˜ = 1.4(5.02 + 2.5) + 1.6(3.5) = 16.13๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2 The total design load on the strip slab adjacent to the column is ๐น = 16.13 ร— 6 = 580.7๐‘˜๐‘ The moments in the flat slab calculated using coefficients from table 3.19 of the code and the distribution of the design moments in the panels of the flat slab is made in accordance with table 3.20. the moments in the flat slab are as follows. For the first interior support, โˆ’0.063 ร— 580.7 ร— 5.35 = โˆ’195.7๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š For the centre of the interior span +0.071 ร— 580.7 ร— 5.35 = 220.6๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š The distribution in the panels is as follows. For the column strip ๐‘›๐‘’๐‘”๐‘Ž๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘ฃ๐‘’๐‘š๐‘œ๐‘š๐‘’๐‘›๐‘ก = โˆ’0.75 ร— 195.7 = โˆ’146.8๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘ ๐‘–๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘ฃ๐‘’๐‘š๐‘œ๐‘š๐‘’๐‘›๐‘ก = 0.55 ร— 2250.6 = 121.3๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š For middle strip ๐‘›๐‘’๐‘”๐‘Ž๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘ฃ๐‘’๐‘š๐‘œ๐‘š๐‘’๐‘›๐‘ก = โˆ’0.25 ร— 195.7 = โˆ’48.9๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘ ๐‘–๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘ฃ๐‘’๐‘š๐‘œ๐‘š๐‘’๐‘›๐‘ก = 0.45 ร— 220.6 = 99.3๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š Design of moment reinforcement The cover is 25mm and 16mm diameter bars in 2 layers are assumed. At eh drop the effective depth for the inner layer is 250 โˆ’ 25 โˆ’ 16 โˆ’ 8 = 201๐‘š๐‘š In the slab the effective depth is 200 โˆ’ 25 โˆ’ 16 โˆ’ 8 = 151๐‘š๐‘š The design calculations for the reinforcement in the column and middle strip are made using b=3000mm Column strip negative reinforcement ๐‘€ ๐‘๐‘‘2 = 146.8 ร— 106 3000 ร— 2012 = 1.21
  • 38. 38 From the table above, M/bd2<1.27 Therefore ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = ๐‘€ 0.87๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ๐‘ง = 146.8 ร— 106 0.87 ร— 460 ร— 0.95 ร— 201 = 3534๐‘š๐‘š2 Provide 19bars 16mm in diameter to give an area of 3819mm2. Two thirds of the bars i.e. 13bars are placed in the centre half of the columns strip at a spacing of 125mm. a further four bars are placed in each of the outer strips at a spacing of 190mm. this gives 21 bars in total
  • 39. 39 Column strip positive reinforcement ๐‘€ ๐‘๐‘‘2 = 121.3 ร— 106 3000 ร— 1512 = 1.77 From the diagram above, M/bd2>1.27 Therefore 100๐ด๐‘  ๐‘๐‘‘ = 0.92 ๐ด๐‘  = 0.92 ร— 3000 ร— 151 100 = 4167.6๐‘š๐‘š2 Provide 21 16mm bars spaced at 150mm (4221mm2) Middle strip negative reinforcement ๐‘€ ๐‘๐‘‘2 = 48.9 ร— 106 3000 ร— 1512 = 0.71 < 1.27 Therefore ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = ๐‘€ 0.87๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ๐‘ง = 48.9 ร— 106 0.87 ร— 250 ร— 0.95 ร— 151 = 1567.3๐‘š๐‘š2 Therefore provide 15 bars 12mm diameter at 200mm (1695mm2) Middle strip positive moment ๐‘€ ๐‘๐‘‘2 = 99.3 ร— 106 3000 ร— 1512 = 1.45 > 1.27 Therefore 100๐ด๐‘  ๐‘๐‘‘ = 0.75 ๐ด๐‘  = 0.75 ร— 3000 ร— 151 100 = 3397.5๐‘š๐‘š2 Therefore provide 18 bars 16mm diameter at 175mm (3618mm2) Shear Shear ๐‘‰ = 1.15 ร— 16.13(36 โˆ’ 0.872) = 653.7๐‘˜๐‘ Shear stress (clause 3.7.7.2) ๐œˆ = ๐‘‰ ๐‘ข0๐‘‘ = 653.7 ร— 103 4 ร— 870 ร— 201 = 0.93๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 < 0.8โˆš๐‘“ ๐‘๐‘ข Therefore maximum shear force is satisfactory 1. At 1.5d from the face of the column Perimeter u = 4[(2 ร— 1.5 ร— 201) + 870] = 5892๐‘š๐‘š Shear ๐‘‰ = 1.15 ร— 16.13(36 โˆ’ 1.4732) = 627.5๐‘˜๐‘
  • 40. 40 Shear stress ๐œˆ = ๐‘‰ ๐‘ข๐‘‘ = 627.5 ร— 103 5892 ร— 201 = 0.53๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 In the centre half of the column strip 16mm diameter bars are spaced at 125mm (1608mm2) 100๐ด๐‘  ๐‘๐‘‘ = 100 ร— 1608 1000 ร— 201 = 0.8 From table 3.8, ๐‘ฃ๐‘ = 0.67 ร— ( 30 25 ) 1 3 โ„ = 0.71๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 ๐‘ฃ๐‘ > ๐‘ฃ โˆด no shear reinforcement is required Deflection Check Service stress ๐‘“ ๐‘  = 2๐‘“๐‘ฆ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ž 3๐ด๐‘ ๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘œ๐‘ฃ = 2 ร— 250 ร— 3782.5 3 ร— 3919.5 = 150.8๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 Modification Factor ๐‘€๐น = 0.55 + 477 โˆ’ ๐‘“ ๐‘  120 (0.9 + ๐‘€ ๐‘๐‘‘2) = 0.55 + 477 โˆ’ 150.8 120(0.9 + 1.61) = 1.63 Permissible deflection ๐›ฟ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘š = 1.63 ร— 26 = 42.4๐‘š๐‘š Actual deflection ๐›ฟ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก = ๐‘ ๐‘๐‘Ž๐‘› ๐‘’๐‘“๐‘“๐‘’๐‘๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘ฃ๐‘’๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘๐‘กโ„Ž = 6000 151 = 39.7๐‘š๐‘š The slab is therefore ok in deflection Cracking According to Clause 3.12.11.2.7 maximum spacing between bars should be the lesser of 750mm of 3 times the effective depth. For drop panel 3๐‘‘ = 3 ร— 201 = 603๐‘š๐‘š For slab 3๐‘‘ = 3 ร— 151 = 453๐‘š๐‘š No reinforcement spacing exceeds these therefore ok.
  • 41. 41 Arrangement of bars Arrangement of bars is as shown below
  • 42. 42 SUMMARY ON SLAB DESIGN 1. Dimensional Considerations The two principal dimensional considerations for a one way spanning slab are its width and effective span. 2. Reinforcement areas Sufficient reinforcement must be provided in order to control cracking. Minimum area of reinforcement should be ๏‚ท 0.24% of total concrete area when fy=250N/mm2 ๏‚ท 0.13% of total concrete area when fy=460N/mm2 The minimum area of distribution steel is the same as for the minimum main reinforcement area. The size of bars for the slab should not be less than 10mm diameter. They should also not exceed 20mm. 3. Minimum spacing of reinforcement The minimum spacing between bars should be = โ„Ž๐‘Ž๐‘”๐‘” + 5๐‘š๐‘š. The size of poker used to compact concrete also affects the spacing between bars. The most commonly used poker is 40mm in diameter. The spacing between bars should therefore be about 50mm. However, for practical reasons, the spacing in between bars should not be less than 150mm 4. Maximum spacing of reinforcement The clear distance between bars in a slab should never exceed the lesser of 3 times the effective depth or 750mm. However, for practical reasons, the spacing of bars in a slab should not be more than 300mm 5. Bending ULS 6. Cracking SLS 7. Deflection SLS 8. Shear ULS For practical reasons, BS 8110 does not recommend the inclusion of shear reinforcement in solid slabs less than 200mm deep. This therefore implies that the design shear stress should not exceed the concrete shear stress
  • 43. 43 BEAMS Beams are flexural horizontal members. The 2 common types of reinforced concrete beam section are 1. Rectangular section 2. Flanged sections of either โ€“ L and T 1. Rectangular Singly Reinforced beam The concrete stress is This is generally rounded off to 0.45fcu. The strain is 0.0035 as shown in the figure above Referring to table 2.2for high yield bars, the steel stress is ๐‘“๐‘ฆ 1.15 โ„ = 0.87๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ From the stress diagram above, the internal forces are C =force in the concrete in compression
  • 44. 44 = 0.447๐‘“ ๐‘๐‘ข ร— 0.9๐‘ ร— 0.5๐‘‘ = 0.201๐‘“ ๐‘๐‘ข๐‘๐‘‘ T =force in the steel in tension = 0.87๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ๐ด๐‘  For the internal forces to be in equilibrium C=T. ๐‘ง = ๐‘™๐‘’๐‘ฃ๐‘’๐‘Ÿ ๐‘Ž๐‘Ÿ๐‘š = ๐‘‘ โˆ’ 0.5 ร— 0.9 ร— 0.5๐‘‘ = 0.775๐‘‘ MRC=moment of resistance with respect to the concrete = ๐ถ ร— ๐‘ง = 0.201๐‘“ ๐‘๐‘ข๐‘๐‘‘ ร— 0.775๐‘‘ = 0.156๐‘“ ๐‘๐‘ข๐‘๐‘‘2 = ๐พ๐‘“๐‘๐‘ข๐‘๐‘‘2 Where the constant K=0.156 ๐‘€ = ๐พ๐‘๐‘‘2 ๐‘“๐‘๐‘ข ๐พ = ๐‘€ ๐‘๐‘‘2๐‘“๐‘๐‘ข MRT=moment of resistance with respect to the steel = ๐‘‡ ร— ๐‘ง = 0.87๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ๐ด๐‘  ร— ๐‘ง ๐ด๐‘  = ๐‘€ 0.87๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ๐‘ง 2. Flanged beams There are two types of flanged beams namely ๏‚ท L-beam โ€“ mostly found at edges ๏‚ท T-beam
  • 45. 45 T and L beams form part of a concrete beam and slab floor. When the beams are resisting sagging moments, part of the slab acts as a compression flange and the members may be designed as L or T-beams. According to clause 3.4.1.5, the effective widths ๐‘๐‘“of flanged beams are: a) For T-beams: web width + ๐‘™๐‘ง 5 โ„ or actual flange width if less b) For L-beams: web width + ๐‘™๐‘ง 10 โ„ or actual flange width if less Where ๐‘™๐‘งis the distance between points of zero moment (which for a continuous beam may be taken as 0.7times the effective span) ๐พ = ๐‘€ ๐‘๐‘“๐‘‘2๐‘“ ๐‘๐‘ข ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = ๐‘€ 0.87๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ๐‘ง min ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = 0.13%๐‘๐‘คโ„Ž ๐œˆ = ๐‘‰ ๐‘๐‘ค๐‘‘ 100๐ด๐‘  ๐‘๐‘ค๐‘‘ Example
  • 46. 46 A concrete section of ๐‘๐‘ค = 250๐‘š๐‘šand ๐‘๐‘“ = 600๐‘š๐‘š, slab thickness = 150mm and beam depth = 530mm, ๐‘“ ๐‘๐‘ข = 25๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 and ๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ = 425๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 . Design moment at the ultimate limit state is 160kNm, causing sagging. ๐พ = ๐‘€ ๐‘๐‘“๐‘‘2๐‘“ ๐‘๐‘ข = 160 ร— 106 600 ร— 5302 ร— 25 = 0.038 ๐‘ง = 0.95๐‘‘ = 0.95 ร— 530 = 503๐‘š๐‘š ๐ท๐‘’๐‘๐‘กโ„Ž ๐‘œ๐‘“ ๐‘›๐‘’๐‘ข๐‘ก๐‘Ÿ๐‘Ž๐‘™ ๐‘Ž๐‘ฅ๐‘–๐‘  ๐‘ฅ = ๐‘‘ โˆ’ ๐‘ง 0.45 = (530 โˆ’ 503) 0.45 = 60๐‘š๐‘š < 150๐‘š๐‘š ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = ๐‘€ 0.87๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ๐‘ง = 160 ร— 106 0.87 ร— 425 ร— 0.95 ร— 530 = 861๐‘š๐‘š2 Therefore provide 2Y25 bars area=982mm2 Transverse steel in the flange ๐‘ก๐‘Ÿ๐‘Ž๐‘›๐‘ ๐‘ฃ๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘ ๐‘’ ๐‘ ๐‘ก๐‘’๐‘’๐‘™ ๐‘–๐‘› ๐‘กโ„Ž๐‘’ ๐‘“๐‘™๐‘Ž๐‘›๐‘”๐‘’ = 3โ„Ž๐‘“ = 3 ร— 150 = 450๐‘š๐‘š2 /๐‘š Therefore provide Y10 bars at 150mm centres = 523mm2 DESIGN OF REINFORCED CONCRETE BEAMS Dimensional requirements and limitations to be considered by the designer in design of beams: a) Effective span of beams The effective span of a simply supported beam may be taken as the lesser of ๏‚ท The distance between the centers of bearing ๏‚ท The clear distance between the supports plus the effective depth The effective length of a cantilever is its length to the face of the support plus half its effective depth b) Deep beams Deep beams having a clear span of less than twice its effective depth is not considered in BS8110 c) Slender beams Slender beams, where the breadth of the compression face bc is small compared with the depth, have a tendency to fail by lateral buckling. To prevent such failure the clear distance between lateral restraints should be limited as follows: ๏‚ท For simply supported beams to the lesser of 60bc or 250bc 2/d ๏‚ท To cantilevers restrained only at the support, to the lesser of 25bc or 100bc 2/d d) Main reinforcement areas
  • 47. 47 Sufficient reinforcement must be provided in order to control cracking. Minimum area of reinforcement should be ๏‚ท 0.24% of total concrete area when fy=250N/mm2 ๏‚ท 0.13% of total concrete area when fy=460N/mm2 e) Minimum spacing of reinforcement Minimum spacing of reinforcement should be = โ„Ž๐‘Ž๐‘”๐‘” + 5๐‘š๐‘š f) Maximum spacing of reinforcement When the limitation of crack widths to 0.3mm is acceptable and the cover to reinforcement does not exceed 50mm, the maximum clear distance between adjacent bars will be: ๏‚ท 300mm when fy=250N/mm2 ๏‚ท 160mm when fy=460N/mm2 The main structural design requirements to examine in concrete beams are: a) Bending ULS b) Cracking SLS c) Deflection SLS d) Shear ULS Steps in beam design The steps in beam design are as follows. (a) Preliminary size of beam The layout and size of members are very often controlled by architectural details, and clearances for machinery and equipment. The engineer must check whether the beams provided are adequate, otherwise, he should resize them appropriately. Beam dimensions required are: 1. Cover to the reinforcement 2. Breadth (b) 3. Effective depth (d) 4. Overall depth (h) The strength of a beam is affected more by its depth than its breadth. ๐‘‚๐‘ฃ๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘Ž๐‘™๐‘™ ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘๐‘กโ„Ž = ๐‘ ๐‘๐‘Ž๐‘›/15 ๐ต๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘Ž๐‘‘๐‘กโ„Ž = 0.6 ร— ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘๐‘กโ„Ž (b) Estimation of loads The loads include an allowance for self-weight which will be based on experience orcalculated from the assumed dimensions for the beam. The original estimate mayrequire checking after the final design is complete. The estimation of loads shouldalso include the weight of screed, finish, partitions, ceiling and services if applicable. The imposed loading depending on the type of occupancy is taken from BS6399: Part1. (c) Analysis
  • 48. 48 The design loads are calculated using appropriate partial factors of safety fromBS8110: Part 1, Table 2.1. The reactions, shears and moments are determined and theshear force and bending moment diagrams are drawn. (d) Design of moment reinforcement The reinforcement is designed at the point of maximum moment, usually the centre ofthe beam. Refer to BS8110: Part 1, section 3.4.4. (e) Curtailment and end anchorage A sketch of the beam in elevation is made and the cut-off point for part of the tensionreinforcement is determined. The end anchorage for bars continuing to the end of thebeam is set out to comply with code requirements. (f) Design for shear Shear stresses are checked and shear reinforcement is designed using the proceduresset out in BS8110: Part 1, section 3.4.5. Notethat except for minor beams such as lintels all beams must be provided with links asshear reinforcement. Small diameter bars are required in the top of the beam to carryand anchor the links. (g) Deflection Deflection is checked using the rules from BS8110: Part 1, section 3.4.6.9 (h) Cracking The maximum clear distance between bars on the tension face is checked against thelimits given in BS8110: Part 1, clause 3.12.11. (i) Design sketch Design sketches of the beam with elevation and sections are completed to show all information. Design of Rectangular beam (singly reinforced) Example A beam of size 450x200mm is supported over a span of 4m. The dead load on the beam is 12kN/m and the imposed load is 15kN/m. Characteristic material strengths are ๐‘“ ๐‘๐‘ข = 25๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 and ๐‘“๐‘ฆ = 460๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 Solution ๐‘‘ = โ„Ž โˆ’ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘›๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ก๐‘’ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘ฃ๐‘’๐‘Ÿ โˆ’ ๐›ท 2 โ„ Assume ๐›ท = 20๐‘š๐‘š ๐‘‘ = 450 โˆ’ 25 โˆ’ 20 2 โ„ = 415๐‘š๐‘š 1. Loading DL Self weight= 0.45 ร— 0.20 ร— 24 = 2.16๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š Other = 12๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š Total = 14.16๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š LL
  • 49. 49 Live load = 15๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š Design Load ๐‘› = 1.4๐บ๐‘˜ + 1.6๐‘„๐‘˜ = 1.4 ร— 14.16 + 1.6 ร— 15 = 43.84๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š Maximum moment ๐‘€ = ๐‘ค๐‘™2 8 ๐‘€ = 43.84 ร— 42 8 = 87.68๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š Maximum shear ๐‘‰ = ๐‘ค๐‘™ 2 ๐‘‰ = 43.84 ร— 4 2 ๐‘‰ = 87.68๐‘˜๐‘ 2. Design Bending ๐พ = ๐‘€ ๐‘๐‘‘2๐‘“ ๐‘๐‘ข = 87.68 ร— 106 200 ร— 4152 ร— 25 = 0.101 ๐‘ง = 0.87๐‘‘ Area of steel required ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = ๐‘€ 0.87๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ๐‘ง = 87.68 ร— 106 0.87 ร— 460 ร— 0.87 ร— 415
  • 50. 50 = 607๐‘š๐‘š2 Minimum area of steel required min ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = 0.13%๐‘โ„Ž = 0.13 100 ร— 450 ร— 200 = 117๐‘š๐‘š2 Therefore try 2Y20 bars (628mm2) Shear reinforcement ๐‘‰ ๐‘š๐‘Ž๐‘ฅ = 87.68๐‘˜๐‘ Shear stress ๐œˆ = ๐‘‰ ๐‘๐‘‘ = 87.68 ร— 103 200 ร— 415 = 1.06๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 0.8โˆš๐‘“ ๐‘๐‘ข = 0.8โˆš25 = 4.0๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 Concrete shear stress 100๐ด๐‘  ๐‘๐‘‘ = 100 ร— 628 200 ร— 415 = 0.76 Table 3.8 (BS 8110) ๐œˆ๐‘ = 0.572๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 ๐œˆ > ๐œˆ๐‘therefore shear reinforcement is required Table 3.7 (BS 8110) 0.5๐œˆ๐‘ = 0.5 ร— 0.572 = 0.286๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 ๐œˆ๐‘ + 0.4 = 0.572 + 0.4 = 0.972๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 0.8โˆš๐‘“ ๐‘๐‘ข = 0.8โˆš25 = 4.0๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 ๐œˆ๐‘ + 0.4 < ๐œˆ < 0.8โˆš๐‘“๐‘๐‘ขtherefore use the formula: ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ฃ โ‰ฅ ๐‘๐‘ฃ๐‘ ๐‘ฃ(๐œˆ โˆ’ ๐œˆ๐‘)/0.95๐‘“๐‘ฆ๐‘ฃ Therefore, ๐‘ ๐‘ฃ โ‰ค 0.95๐‘“๐‘ฆ๐‘ฃ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ฃ ๐‘๐‘ฃ(๐œˆ โˆ’ ๐œˆ๐‘) Assume 2 legs Y8 links ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = 101๐‘š๐‘š2 , ๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ๐‘ฃ = 250๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
  • 51. 51 ๐‘ ๐‘ฃ โ‰ค 0.95 ร— 250 ร— 101 200(1.06 โˆ’ 0.572) ๐‘ ๐‘ฃ โ‰ค 246๐‘š๐‘š Therefore provide 2 legs Y8 โ€“ 225 links Deflection Check Service stress ๐‘“๐‘  = 2๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ๐ด๐‘  ๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ž 3๐ด๐‘  ๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘œ๐‘ฃ = 2 ร— 460 ร— 607 3 ร— 628 = 296 Modification factor ๐‘€๐น = 0.55 + 477 โˆ’ ๐‘“ ๐‘  120 (0.9 + ๐‘€ ๐‘๐‘‘2) = 0.55 + 477 โˆ’ 296 120(0.9 + 2.525) = 0.99 < 2.0 โˆด ok Permissible deflection ๐›ฟ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘š = ๐‘€๐น ร— 20 ๐›ฟ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘š = 0.99 ร— 20 = 19.8๐‘š๐‘š Actual deflection ๐›ฟ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก = ๐‘ ๐‘๐‘Ž๐‘› ๐‘’๐‘“๐‘“ ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘๐‘กโ„Ž = 4000 415 = 9.64๐‘š๐‘š ๐›ฟ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘š > ๐›ฟ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘กtherefore the beam is adequate in deflection Continuous rectangular beam
  • 52. 52 For uniformly loaded continuous beams with approximately equal spans, table 3.5 (also shown below) can be used in analysis to find moments and shear at the supports. Other conditions for such a beam are (clause 3.4.3): a) Characteristic imposed load should not exceed characteristic dead load b) Loads should be substantially uniformly distributed over three or more spans c) Variations in span length should not exceed 15% of longest At outer support Near middle of end span At first interior support At middle of interior spans At interior support Moment 0 0.09Fl -0.11Fl 0.07Fl -0.08Fl Shear 0.45F - 0.6F - 0.55F Example A continuous rectangular beam of 450x200mm has a dead load of 18kN/m and live load of 12kN/m. characteristic strengths ๐‘“๐‘๐‘ข = 25๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 and ๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ = 460๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 Solution ๐‘‘ = โ„Ž โˆ’ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘›๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ก๐‘’ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘ฃ๐‘’๐‘Ÿ โˆ’ ๐‘™๐‘–๐‘›๐‘˜๐‘  โˆ’ ๐›ท 2 โ„ Assume Y8 links and ๐›ท = 20๐‘š๐‘š ๐‘‘ = 450 โˆ’ 25 โˆ’ 8 โˆ’ 20 2 โ„ = 407๐‘š๐‘š 1. Loading DL Self weight of beam = 0.45 ร— 0.2 ร— 24 = 2.16๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š Other = 18.00๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š Total= 2.16 + 18.00 = 20.16๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š LL Live load = 12.00๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘–๐‘”๐‘› ๐‘™๐‘œ๐‘Ž๐‘‘ ๐‘› = 1.4 ร— 20.16 + 1.6 ร— 12.00 = 47.42๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š 2. Analysis Table 3.5 a) At support Critical moment = โˆ’0.11๐น๐‘™ ๐‘€ = 0.11 ร— 47.42 ร— 4.0 = 20.86๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š
  • 53. 53 Critical shear = 0.6๐น ๐‘‰ = 0.6 ร— 47.42 = 28.45๐‘˜๐‘ b) At spans Critical moment = 0.09๐น๐‘™ ๐‘€ = 0.09 ร— 47.42 ร— 4.0 = 17.07๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š 3. Design ๏‚ท Bending a) At support ๐พ = ๐‘€ ๐‘๐‘‘2๐‘“ ๐‘๐‘ข = 20.86 ร— 106 200 ร— 4072 ร— 25 = 0.025 ๐‘ง = 0.97๐‘‘ > 0.95๐‘‘therefore use ๐‘ง = 0.95๐‘‘ Area of steel required ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = ๐‘€ 0.87๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ๐‘ง = 20.86 ร— 106 0.87 ร— 460 ร— 0.95 ร— 407 = 135๐‘š๐‘š2 Minimum area of steel required ๐‘š๐‘–๐‘›๐‘Ž๐‘ ๐‘ก = 0.13%๐‘โ„Ž = 0.13 ร— 200 ร— 450 100 = 227.5๐‘š๐‘š2 Therefore provide 3Y12 (339mm2) b) At span ๐พ = ๐‘€ ๐‘๐‘‘2๐‘“ ๐‘๐‘ข = 17.07 ร— 106 200 ร— 4072 ร— 25 = 0.021 ๐‘ง = 0.98๐‘‘ > 0.95๐‘‘therefore use ๐‘ง = 0.95๐‘‘ Area of steel required ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = ๐‘€ 0.87๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ๐‘ง = 17.07 ร— 106 0.87 ร— 460 ร— 0.95 ร— 407 = 110๐‘š๐‘š2 Minimum area of steel required
  • 54. 54 ๐‘š๐‘–๐‘›๐‘Ž๐‘ ๐‘ก = 0.13%๐‘โ„Ž = 0.13 ร— 200 ร— 450 100 = 227.5๐‘š๐‘š2 Therefore try 3Y12B (339mm2) ๏‚ท Shear ๐‘‰ ๐‘š๐‘Ž๐‘ฅ = 28.45๐‘˜๐‘ Shear stress ๐œˆ = ๐‘‰ ๐‘๐‘‘ = 28.45 ร— 103 200 ร— 407 = 0.35๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 100๐ด๐‘  ๐‘๐‘‘ = 100 ร— 339 200 ร— 407 = 0.42 Concrete shear stress Table 3.8 ๐œˆ๐‘ = 0.47๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 ๐œˆ๐‘ > ๐œˆtherefore no shear reinforcement is required. Provide nominal reinforcement i.e. provide 2 legs Y8 โ€“ 250 links ๏‚ท Deflection Service stress ๐‘“ ๐‘  = 2๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ๐ด๐‘  ๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ž 3๐ด๐‘  ๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘œ๐‘ฃ = 2 ร— 460 ร— 227.5 3 ร— 339 = 206 Modification factor ๐‘€๐น = 0.55 + 477 โˆ’ ๐‘“ ๐‘  120 (0.9 + ๐‘€ ๐‘๐‘‘2 ) = 0.55 + 477 โˆ’ 206 120(0.9 + 0.5190) = 2.14 > 2.0 Therefore use MF=2.0 Permissible deflection ๐›ฟ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘š = ๐‘€๐น ร— ๐‘ ๐‘๐‘Ž๐‘›/๐‘’๐‘“๐‘“ ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘๐‘กโ„Ž ๐‘Ÿ๐‘Ž๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘œ = 2.0 ร— 26 = 56๐‘š๐‘š Actual deflection
  • 55. 55 ๐›ฟ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก = ๐‘ ๐‘๐‘Ž๐‘› ๐‘’๐‘“๐‘“๐‘’๐‘๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘ฃ๐‘’ ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘๐‘กโ„Ž = 4000 407 = 9.83๐‘š๐‘š ๐›ฟ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก < ๐›ฟ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘štherefore ok If the conditions in clause 3.4.3 are not fulfilled, then the beam can be analyzed by method of distribution of moments Example A continuous flange beam of 450x200mm has 3 spans. The end spans have a dead load of 15kN/m and live load of 12kN/m. The middle span has a dead load of 20kN/m and live load of 16kN/m. characteristic strengths ๐‘“๐‘๐‘ข = 25๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 and ๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ = 460๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 Solution ๐‘‘ = โ„Ž โˆ’ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘›๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ก๐‘’ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘ฃ๐‘’๐‘Ÿ โˆ’ ๐‘™๐‘–๐‘›๐‘˜๐‘  โˆ’ ๐›ท 2 โ„ Assume Y8 links and ๐›ท = 20๐‘š๐‘š ๐‘‘ = 450 โˆ’ 25 โˆ’ 8 โˆ’ 20 2 โ„ = 407๐‘š๐‘š a) Loading End spans DL Self weight of beam = 0.45 ร— 0.2 ร— 24 = 2.16๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š Other = 15.00๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š Total= 2.16 + 15.00 = 17.16๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š LL Live load = 12.00๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘–๐‘”๐‘› ๐‘™๐‘œ๐‘Ž๐‘‘ ๐‘› = 1.4 ร— 17.16 + 1.6 ร— 12.00 = 43.22๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š Middle span
  • 56. 56 DL Self weight of beam = 0.45 ร— 0.2 ร— 24 = 2.16๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š Other = 20.00๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š Total= 2.16 + 20.00 = 22.16๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š LL Live load = 16.00๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘–๐‘”๐‘› ๐‘™๐‘œ๐‘Ž๐‘‘ ๐‘› = 1.4 ร— 22.16 + 1.6 ร— 16.00 = 56.62๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š Stiffness factors (k) ๐‘˜ = ๐ผ ๐‘™ For the shorter span ๐‘˜๐‘  = ๐ผ 2.5 = 0.4๐ผ For the longer span ๐‘˜๐‘™ = ๐ผ 4 = 0.25๐ผ Distribution Factor For the shorter span ๐ท๐น = ๐‘˜๐‘  ๐‘˜๐‘  + ๐‘˜๐‘™ = 0.4 0.4 + 0.25 = 0.62 For the longer span ๐ท๐น = ๐‘˜๐‘™ ๐‘˜๐‘  + ๐‘˜๐‘™ = 0.25 0.4 + 0.25 = 0.38 Fixed End Moments For the shorter span ๐น๐ธ๐‘€ = ๐‘ค๐‘™2 12 = 43.22 ร— 2.52 12 = 22.51๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š For longer span ๐น๐ธ๐‘€ = ๐‘ค๐‘™2 12 = 56.62 ร— 42 12 = 75.5๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š
  • 57. 57 Analysis Taking moments about 2 2.5๐‘‰1 + 59.64 โˆ’ 43.22 ร— 2.52 2 = 0 ๐‘‰1 = 30.17๐‘˜๐‘ Taking moments about 1 43.22 ร— 2.52 2 + 59.64 โˆ’ 2.5๐‘‰1โˆ’2 = 0 ๐‘‰1โˆ’2 = 77.88๐‘˜๐‘ Taking moments about 3 4๐‘‰2โˆ’3 โˆ’ 59.64 + 59.64 โˆ’ 56.62 ร— 42 2 = 0 ๐‘‰2โˆ’3 = 113.24๐‘˜๐‘ Taking moments about 2 56.62 ร— 42 2 + 59.64 โˆ’ 59.64 โˆ’ 4๐‘‰3โˆ’2 = 0 ๐‘‰3โˆ’2 = 113.24๐‘˜๐‘ Taking moments about 4 2.5๐‘‰4โˆ’5 โˆ’ 43.22 ร— 2.52 2 โˆ’ 59.64 = 0 ๐‘‰4โˆ’5 = 77.88๐‘˜๐‘ Taking moments about 3 43.22 ร— 2.52 2 โˆ’ 59.64 โˆ’ 2.5๐‘‰5 = 0 ๐‘‰5 = 30.17๐‘˜๐‘
  • 58. 58 Moments 77.88 30.17 = 2.5 โˆ’ ๐‘ฅ ๐‘ฅ ๐‘ฅ = 0.6981๐‘š Also 113.24 113.24 = 4 โˆ’ ๐‘ฆ ๐‘ฆ ๐‘ฆ = 2๐‘š Moment at end span ๐‘€ = 1 2 ร— 30.17 ร— 0.6981 = 10.53๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š Moment at the middle span ๐‘€ = 1 2 ร— 113.24 ร— 2 = 113.24๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š ๐‘€๐‘œ๐‘š๐‘’๐‘›๐‘ก = โˆ’59.64 + 113.24 = 53.6๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š
  • 59. 59 b) Design 1. At support Critical moment = 59.64kNm b = 200mm Bending ๐พ = ๐‘€ ๐‘๐‘‘2๐‘“ ๐‘๐‘ข = 59.64 ร— 106 200 ร— 4072 ร— 25 = 0.072 ๐‘ง = 0.91๐‘‘ Area of steel required ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = ๐‘€ 0.87๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ๐‘ง = 59.64 ร— 106 0.87 ร— 460 ร— 0.91 ร— 407 = 402๐‘š๐‘š2 Minimum Area of steel required min ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = 0.13%๐‘โ„Ž = 0.13 100 ร— 200 ร— 450 = 117๐‘š๐‘š2 Therefore provide 2Y16B (402mm2), 1Y12B (113mm2) 2. At span Critical moment = 53.6kNm ๐‘๐‘“ = 200 + 0.7 ร— 4000 5 = 760๐‘š๐‘š Bending ๐พ = ๐‘€ ๐‘๐‘“๐‘‘2๐‘“ ๐‘๐‘ข = 53.6 ร— 106 760 ร— 4072 ร— 25 = 0.017 ๐‘ง = 0.98๐‘‘ > 0.95๐‘‘therefore, ๐‘ง = 0.95๐‘‘ Area of Steel required ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = ๐‘€ 0.87๐‘“๐‘ฆ๐‘ง = 53.6 ร— 106 0.87 ร— 460 ร— 0.95 ร— 407 = 346.4๐‘š๐‘š2 Minimum Area of steel required = 117mm2 Therefore provide 2Y16B bars (402mm2) Shear ๐‘‰ ๐‘š๐‘Ž๐‘ฅ = 113.24๐‘˜๐‘
  • 60. 60 Shear stress ๐œˆ = ๐‘‰ ๐‘๐‘‘ = 113.24 ร— 103 200 ร— 407 = 1.39๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 100๐ด๐‘  ๐‘๐‘‘ = 100 ร— 402 200 ร— 407 = 0.49 From table 3.8, ๐‘ฃ๐‘ = 0.50๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 ๐‘ฃ๐‘ < ๐‘ฃ โˆด shear reinforcement is required Deflection Check Service stress ๐‘“ ๐‘  = 2๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ๐ด๐‘  ๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ž 3๐ด๐‘  ๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘œ๐‘ฃ = 2 ร— 460 ร— 346.4 3 ร— 402 = 264 Modification Factor ๐‘€๐น = 0.55 + 477 โˆ’ ๐‘“ ๐‘  120 (0.9 + ๐‘€ ๐‘๐‘‘2 ) = 0.55 + 477 โˆ’ 264 120(0.9 + 0.4258) ๐‘€๐น = 1.89 Permissible deflection ๐›ฟ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘š = ๐‘€๐น ร— ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘“๐‘™๐‘’๐‘๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘œ๐‘› ๐‘โ„Ž๐‘’๐‘๐‘˜ = 1.89 ร— 26 = 49.14๐‘š๐‘š Actual deflection ๐›ฟ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก = ๐‘ ๐‘๐‘Ž๐‘› ๐‘’๐‘“๐‘“๐‘’๐‘๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘ฃ๐‘’ ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘๐‘กโ„Ž = 4000 407 = 9.83๐‘š๐‘š ๐›ฟ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘š > ๐›ฟ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก โˆด the beam is adequate in deflection Redoing the example above but assuming that the beams are flanged:
  • 61. 61 Example A continuous flange beam of 450x200mm has a dead load of 18kN/m and live load of 12kN/m. characteristic strengths ๐‘“๐‘๐‘ข = 25๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 and ๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ = 460๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 Solution ๐‘‘ = โ„Ž โˆ’ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘›๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ก๐‘’ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘ฃ๐‘’๐‘Ÿ โˆ’ ๐‘™๐‘–๐‘›๐‘˜๐‘  โˆ’ ๐›ท 2 โ„ Assume Y8 links and ๐›ท = 20๐‘š๐‘š ๐‘‘ = 450 โˆ’ 25 โˆ’ 8 โˆ’ 20 2 โ„ = 407๐‘š๐‘š 4. Loading DL Self weight of beam = 0.45 ร— 0.2 ร— 24 = 2.16๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š Other = 18.00๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š Total= 2.16 + 18.00 = 20.16๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š LL Live load = 12.00๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘–๐‘”๐‘› ๐‘™๐‘œ๐‘Ž๐‘‘ ๐‘› = 1.4 ร— 20.16 + 1.6 ร— 12.00 = 47.42๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š 5. Analysis Table 3.5 c) At support Critical moment = โˆ’0.11๐น๐‘™ ๐‘€ = 0.11 ร— 47.42 ร— 4.0 = 20.86๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š Critical shear = 0.6๐น ๐‘‰ = 0.6 ร— 47.42 = 28.45๐‘˜๐‘ d) At spans Critical moment = 0.09๐น๐‘™ ๐‘€ = 0.09 ร— 47.42 ร— 4.0 = 17.07๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š
  • 62. 62 6. Design ๏‚ท Bending a) At support ๐พ = ๐‘€ ๐‘๐‘‘2๐‘“ ๐‘๐‘ข = 20.86 ร— 106 200 ร— 4072 ร— 25 = 0.025 ๐‘ง = 0.97๐‘‘ > 0.95๐‘‘therefore use ๐‘ง = 0.95๐‘‘ Area of steel required ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = ๐‘€ 0.87๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ๐‘ง = 20.86 ร— 106 0.87 ร— 460 ร— 0.95 ร— 407 = 135๐‘š๐‘š2 Minimum area of steel required ๐‘š๐‘–๐‘›๐‘Ž๐‘ ๐‘ก = 0.13%๐‘โ„Ž = 0.13 ร— 200 ร— 450 100 = 227.5๐‘š๐‘š2 Therefore provide 3Y12 (339mm2) b) At span ๐‘๐‘“ = ๐‘๐‘ค + 0.7๐‘™๐‘ฅ 5 โ„ = 200 + 0.7 ร— 4000 5 = 760๐‘š๐‘š ๐พ = ๐‘€ ๐‘๐‘“๐‘‘2๐‘“ ๐‘๐‘ข = 17.07 ร— 106 760 ร— 4072 ร— 25 = 0.005 ๐‘ง = 0.99๐‘‘ > 0.95๐‘‘therefore use ๐‘ง = 0.95๐‘‘ Area of steel required ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = ๐‘€ 0.87๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ๐‘ง = 17.07 ร— 106 0.87 ร— 460 ร— 0.95 ร— 407 = 110๐‘š๐‘š2 Minimum area of steel required ๐‘š๐‘–๐‘›๐‘Ž๐‘ ๐‘ก = 0.13%๐‘โ„Ž = 0.13 ร— 200 ร— 450 100 = 227.5๐‘š๐‘š2 Therefore try 3Y12B (339mm2) ๏‚ท Shear ๐‘‰ ๐‘š๐‘Ž๐‘ฅ = 28.45๐‘˜๐‘ Shear stress
  • 63. 63 ๐œˆ = ๐‘‰ ๐‘๐‘‘ = 28.45 ร— 103 200 ร— 407 = 0.35๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 100๐ด๐‘  ๐‘๐‘‘ = 100 ร— 339 200 ร— 407 = 0.42 Concrete shear stress Table 3.8 ๐œˆ๐‘ = 0.47๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 ๐œˆ๐‘ > ๐œˆtherefore no shear reinforcement is required. Provide nominal reinforcement i.e. provide 2 legs Y8 โ€“ 250 links ๏‚ท Deflection Service stress ๐‘“ ๐‘  = 2๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ๐ด๐‘  ๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ž 3๐ด๐‘  ๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘œ๐‘ฃ = 2 ร— 460 ร— 227.5 3 ร— 339 = 206 Modification factor ๐‘€๐น = 0.55 + 477 โˆ’ ๐‘“ ๐‘  120 (0.9 + ๐‘€ ๐‘๐‘‘2 ) = 0.55 + 477 โˆ’ 206 120(0.9 + 0.1356) = 2.73 > 2.0 Therefore use MF=2.0 Permissible deflection ๐›ฟ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘š = ๐‘€๐น ร— ๐‘ ๐‘๐‘Ž๐‘›/๐‘’๐‘“๐‘“ ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘๐‘กโ„Ž ๐‘Ÿ๐‘Ž๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘œ = 2.0 ร— 26 = 56๐‘š๐‘š Actual deflection ๐›ฟ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก = ๐‘ ๐‘๐‘Ž๐‘› ๐‘’๐‘“๐‘“๐‘’๐‘๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘ฃ๐‘’ ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘๐‘กโ„Ž = 4000 407 = 9.83๐‘š๐‘š ๐›ฟ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก < ๐›ฟ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘šthereforethe beam is adequate in deflection
  • 64. 64 SUMMARY ON DESIGN OF BEAMS a) Calculate the ultimate loads, shear force and bending moment acting on the beam b) Check the bending ULS. This will determine an adequate depth for the beam and the area of tension reinforcement required c) Check deflection SLS by using relevant span effective depth ratios d) Check shear ULS and provide the relevant link reinforcement NB: Provide anti-crack bars for beams where โ„Ž > 750๐‘š๐‘š
  • 65. 65 COLUMNS Columns are structures that carry loads from the beams and the slabs down to the foundations. They are therefore primarily compression members although they may also have to resist bending forces due to the continuity of the structure. Classification of columns Reinforced concrete columns are classified as either braced or unbraced, depending on how lateral stability is provided to the structure as a whole. A concrete framed building may be designed to resist lateral loading, e.g. wind action in two distinct ways a) The beam and column may be designed to act together as a rigid frame in transmitting the lateral forces down to the foundations. In such an instance the columns are said to be unbraced and must be designed to carry both the vertical (compressive) and lateral (bending) loads. b) Lateral loading may be transferred via the roof and floors to a system of bracing or shear walls designed to transmit resulting forces down to the foundations. The columns are then said to be braced and consequently carry only vertical loads. Columns may further be classified as short or slender. Braced columns may therefore either be short or slender. For a short braced column ๐‘™๐‘’๐‘ฅ โ„Ž < 15 And ๐‘™๐‘’๐‘ฆ ๐‘ < 15 Where ๐‘™๐‘’๐‘ฅeffective height in respect of column major axis ๐‘™๐‘’๐‘ฆeffective height in respect of column minor axis โ„Ždepth in respect of major axis ๐‘width in respect of minor axis Clause 3.8.1.6 โ€“ ๐‘™๐‘’๐‘ฅand ๐‘™๐‘’๐‘ฆ are influenced by the degree of fixity at each end of the column ๐‘™๐‘’๐‘ฅor ๐‘™๐‘’๐‘ฆ = ๐›ฝ๐‘™0 Types of end conditions (BS 8110 clause 3.8.1.6.2) a) Condition 1. The end of the column is connected monolithically to beams on either side which are at least as deep as the overall dimension of the column in the plane considered. Where the column is connected to a foundation structure, this should be of a form specifically designed to carry moment. b) Condition 2. The end of the column is connected monolithically to beams or slabs on either side which are shallower than the overall dimension of the column in the plane considered.
  • 66. 66 c) Condition 3. The end of the column is connected to members which, while not specifically designed to provide restraint to rotation of the column will, nevertheless, provide some nominal restraint. d) Condition 4. The end of the column is unrestrained against both lateral movement and rotation (e.g. the free end of a cantilever column in an unbraced structure). Table 3.19 can be use to find ๐›ฝ for braced columns End condition at top End condition at bottom 1 2 3 1 0.75 0.80 0.90 2 0.80 0.85 0.95 3 0.90 0.95 1.00 Guidelines for design of short braced columns a) Column cross-section b) Main reinforcement areas c) Minimum spacing of reinforcement d) Maximum spacing of reinforcement e) Lateral reinforcement f) Compressive ULS g) Shear ULS h) Cracking ULS i) Lateral deflection
  • 67. 67 a) Column cross-section The greater cross-sectional dimension should not exceed four times the smaller one. Otherwise it should be treated as a wall. b) Main Reinforcement Areas Adequate reinforcement should be provided in order to control cracking. Minimum area of steel required is 0.4% of the gross cross section area. The maximum area of steel required is 6% of the gross cross section area. Arrangement of bars should be as shown below. ๐ด๐‘” โˆ’gross cross sectional area of the column ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ โˆ’area of main longitudinal reinforcement ๐ด๐‘ โˆ’net cross sectional area of concrete: ๐ด๐‘ = ๐ด๐‘” โˆ’ ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘
  • 68. 68 c) Minimum Spacing of Reinforcement BS 8110 recommends minimum bar spacing of 5mm more than the size of aggregate d) Maximum Spacing of Reinforcement There is no limit of maximum spacing of reinforcement. However, for practical reasons, maximum spacing of main bars should not exceed 250mm e) Links Linksbe provided in columns in order to prevent lateral buckling of the longitudinal main bars due to action of compressive loading f) Compressive ULS This may be divided into 3 categories i) Short braced axially loaded columns ii) Short braced columns supporting an approximately symmetrical arrangement of beams iii) Short braced columns supporting vertical loads and subjected to either uniaxial or biaxial bending a) Short braced axially loaded columns When a short braced column supports a concentric compressive load or where the eccentricity of the compressive load is nominal, it may be considered to be axially loaded. Nominal eccentricity in this context is defined as being not greater than 0.05 times the overall column dimension (for lateral column dimension not greater than 400mm) or 20mm (for lateral column dimension greater than 400mm)in the plane of bending. The ultimate axial resistance is ๐‘ = 0.4๐‘“๐‘๐‘ข๐ด๐‘ + 0.75๐ด๐‘ ๐‘๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ Where Ac is the net cross sectional area of concrete and Asc the area of the longitudinal reinforcement But ๐ด๐‘ = ๐ด๐‘” โˆ’ ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ ๐‘ = 0.4๐‘“ ๐‘๐‘ข(๐ด๐‘” โˆ’ ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘) + 0.75๐ด๐‘ ๐‘๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ b) Short braced columns supporting an approximately symmetrical arrangement of beams The moments of these columns will be small due primarily to unsymmetrical arrangements of the live load. Provided the beam spans do not differ by more than 15% of the longer, and the loading on the beams is uniformly distributed, the column may be designed to support the axial load only. The ultimate load that can be supported should then be taken as
  • 69. 69 ๐‘ = 0.35๐‘“ ๐‘๐‘ข๐ด๐‘ + 0.67๐ด๐‘ ๐‘๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ Or ๐‘ = 0.35๐‘“ ๐‘๐‘ข(๐ด๐‘” โˆ’ ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘) + 0.67๐ด๐‘ ๐‘๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ c) Short braced columns supporting vertical loads and subjected to either uniaxial or biaxial bending Columns supporting beams on adjacent side whose spans vary by more than 15% will be subjected to uniaxial bending Columns at the corners of buildings on the other hand are subjected to biaxial bending. In such an instance, the column should be designed to resist bending about both axes. For such, design carried out for an increased moment about one axis only. If ๐‘€๐‘ฅ โ„Žโ€ฒ โ‰ฅ ๐‘€๐‘ฆ ๐‘โ€ฒ The increased moment about the x-x axis is ๐‘€โ€ฒ๐‘ฅ = ๐‘€๐‘ฅ + ๐›ฝ โ„Žโ€ฒ ๐‘โ€ฒ ๐‘€๐‘ฆ If ๐‘€๐‘ฅ โ„Žโ€ฒ < ๐‘€๐‘ฆ ๐‘โ€ฒ The increased moment about the y-y axis is
  • 70. 70 ๐‘€โ€ฒ๐‘ฆ = ๐‘€๐‘ฆ + ๐›ฝ ๐‘โ€ฒ โ„Žโ€ฒ ๐‘€๐‘ฅ Where ๐‘overall section dimension perpendicular to y-y axis ๐‘โ€ฒeffective depth perpendicular to y-y axis โ„Žoverall section dimension perpendicular to x-x axis โ„Žโ€ฒeffective depth perpendicular to x-x axis ๐‘€๐‘ฅbending moment about x-x axis ๐‘€๐‘ฆbending about y-y axis ๐›ฝcoefficient obtained from BS 8110 table 3.22 The area of reinforcement can then be found from the appropriate design chart in BS 8110 Part 3 using N/bh and M/bh2 g) Shear ULS Axially loaded columns are not subjected to shear and therefore no check is necessary. h) Cracking SLS Since cracks are produced by flexure of the concrete, short columns that support axial loads alone do not require checking for cracking. However, all other columns subject to bending should be considered as beams for the purpose of examining the cracking SLS. i) Lateral Deflection Deflection check for short braced columns is not necessary Examples Example 1 A short braced column in a situation of mild exposure supports an ultimate axial load of 1000kN, the size of the column being 250mm x 250mm. Using grade 30 concrete with mild reinforcement, calculate the size of all reinforcement required and the maximum effective height for the column if it is to be considered as a short column. Solution ๐‘ = 0.4๐‘“ ๐‘๐‘ข(๐ด๐‘” โˆ’ ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘) + 0.75๐ด๐‘ ๐‘๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ 1000 ร— 103 = 0.4 ร— 30(250 ร— 250 โˆ’ ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘) + 0.75๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ ร— 250 1000000 = 750000 โˆ’ 12๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ + 187.5๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ = 1424.5๐‘š๐‘š2 Try 4 Y25 (1966mm2)
  • 71. 71 Links Diameter required: The diameter required is the greater of a. One quarter of the diameter of the largest main bar i.e. 25/4=6.25mm b. 6mm The spacing is the lesser of 12 times the diameter of the smallest main bar i.e. 12x25=300mm or the smallest cross-sectional dimension of the column i.e. 250mm Therefore provide Y8 links at 250mm spacing Maximum effective height ๐‘™๐‘’ โ„Ž = 15 ๐‘™๐‘’ = 15โ„Ž = 15 ร— 250 = 3750๐‘š๐‘š Example 2 A short braced reinforced concrete column supports an approximately symmetrical arrangement of beams which result in a total vertical load of 1500kN being applied to the column. Assuming the percentage of steel to be 1 %, choose suitable dimensions for the column and the diameter of the main bars. Use HY reinforcement in a square column ๐‘ = 0.35๐‘“ ๐‘๐‘ข(๐ด๐‘” โˆ’ ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘) + 0.67๐ด๐‘ ๐‘๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ = 0.01๐ด๐‘” 1500 ร— 103 = 0.35 ร— 35(๐ด๐‘” โˆ’ 0.01๐ด๐‘”) + 0.67 ร— 0.01๐ด๐‘” ร— 460 1500 ร— 103 = 12.25๐ด๐‘” โˆ’ 0.1225๐ด๐‘” + 3.082๐ด๐‘” ๐ด๐‘” = 1500 ร— 1000 15.21 = 98619.33๐‘š๐‘š2 Length of column sides = โˆš98619.33 = 314.04๐‘š๐‘š Therefore provide 315 x 315mm square grade 35 concrete column Actual ๐ด๐‘” = 315 ร— 315 = 99225๐‘š๐‘š2 ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ = 0.01 ร— 99225 = 992.25๐‘š๐‘š2 Therefore provide four 20mm diameter HY bars (1256mm2)
  • 72. 72 Example 3 A short braced column supporting a vertical load and subjected to biaxial bending is shown below. If the column is formed from grade 40 concrete, determine the size of HY main reinforcement required. Assume 20mm diameter bars will be adopted. โ„Žโ€ฒ = 300 โˆ’ 30 โˆ’ 20 2 โ„ = 260๐‘š๐‘š ๐‘โ€ฒ = 250 โˆ’ 30 โˆ’ 20 2 โ„ = 210๐‘š๐‘š ๐‘€๐‘ฅ โ„Žโ€ฒ = 60 260 = 0.23 ๐‘€๐‘ฆ ๐‘โ€ฒ = 35 210 = 0.17 ๐‘€๐‘ฅ โ„Žโ€ฒ > ๐‘€๐‘ฆ ๐‘โ€ฒ Hence use equation 40 of BS 8110 ๐‘€โ€ฒ๐‘ฅ = ๐‘€๐‘ฅ + ๐›ฝ โ„Žโ€ฒ ๐‘โ€ฒ ๐‘€๐‘ฆ ๐‘ ๐‘โ„Ž๐‘“๐‘๐‘ข = 600 ร— 103 250 ร— 300 ร— 40 = 0.2
  • 73. 73 From Table 3.22, ๐›ฝ = 0.77 ๐‘€โ€ฒ๐‘ฅ = 60 + 0.77 ร— 260 210 ร— 35 = 93.37๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š ๐‘‘ โ„Ž = 260 300 = 0.87 โ‰ˆ 0.85 ๐‘ ๐‘โ„Ž = 600 ร— 103 250 ร— 300 = 8 ๐‘€ ๐‘โ„Ž2 = 93.37 ร— 106 250 ร— 3002 = 4.15 Using the chart below: From chart, 100๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ ๐‘โ„Ž = 1.6 ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ = 1.6๐‘โ„Ž 100 = 1.6 ร— 250 ร— 300 100 = 1200๐‘š๐‘š2 Therefore provide 20mm HY bars (1256mm2)
  • 74. 74 NB: BS 6399: Section 6: reduction in total imposed load Clause 6.1 of BS 6399 stipulates that the following loads do not qualify for reduction in total imposed floor loads a) Loads that have been specifically determined from knowledge of the proposed use of the structure; b) Loads due to plant or machinery; c) Loads due to storage. The reductions in loading on columns are given in the table below: Number of floors with loads qualifying for reduction carried by member under consideration Reduction in total distributed imposed load on all floors carried by the member under consideration (%) 1 0 2 10 3 20 4 30 5 to 10 40 Over 10 50 max The table below can be used to calculate the load total load at any particular floor: Imposed Load Cumulative Imposed Load % reduction Reduced Load Total Load Reduction is done on the cumulative imposed load at each level For buildings with more than 5 storeys, it is important to consider factors of safety for earthquake.
  • 75. 75 FOUNDATIONS Foundation is the part of a superstructure that transfers and spreads loads from the structureโ€™s columns and walls into the ground. Types of footing ๏‚ท Pad footing ๏‚ท Combined footing ๏‚ท Strap footing ๏‚ท Strip footing In the design of foundations, the areas of the bases in contact with the ground should be such that the safe bearing pressures will not be exceeded. Design loadings to be to be considered when calculating the base areas should be those that apply to serviceability limit state and they are: ๏‚ท Dead plus imposed load = 1.0๐บ๐‘˜ + 1.0๐‘„๐‘˜ ๏‚ท Dead plus wind load = 1.0๐บ๐‘˜ + 1.0๐‘Š๐‘˜ ๏‚ท Dead plus imposed plus wind load= 1.0๐บ๐‘˜ + 0.8๐‘„๐‘˜ + 0.8๐‘Š๐‘˜ When the foundation is subjected to both vertical and horizontal loads, the following rule should apply: ๐‘‰ ๐‘ƒ ๐‘ฃ + ๐ป ๐‘ƒโ„Ž < 1.0 Where ๐‘‰ = the yield vertical load ๐ป = the horizontal load ๐‘ƒ๐‘ฃ = the allowable vertical load ๐‘ƒโ„Ž = the allowable horizontal load The calculations to determine the structural strength of the foundations, that is the thickness of the bases and the areas of reinforcement, should be based on the loadings and the resultant ground pressures corresponding to the ultimate limit state Pad footing The principal steps in the design calculations are as follows: 1. Calculate the plan size of the footing using the permissible bearing pressure and the critical loading arrangement for the serviceability limit state 2. Calculate the bearing pressures associated with the critical loading arrangement at the ultimate limit state 3. Determine the minimum thickness h of the base 4. Check the thickness h for punching shear, assuming a probable value for the ultimate shear stress
  • 76. 76 5. Determine the reinforcement required to resist bending 6. Make a final check of the punching shear having established the ultimate shear stress precisely 7. Check the shear stress at the critical sections 8. Where applicable, the foundation and structure should be checked for over-all stability at the ultimate limit state Example Design a pad footing to resist characteristic axial loads of 1000kN dead and 350kN imposed from a 400mm square column with 16mm dowels. The safe bearing pressure on the soil is 200kN/m2 and the characteristic material strengths are ๐‘“ ๐‘๐‘ข = 25๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 and ๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ = 425๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 Solution Loading Assume footing self weight of 150kN. ๐‘‡๐‘œ๐‘ก๐‘Ž๐‘™ ๐ท๐ฟ = 1000 + 150 = 1150๐‘˜๐‘ a) For serviceability limit state ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘–๐‘”๐‘› ๐‘Ž๐‘ฅ๐‘–๐‘Ž๐‘™ ๐‘™๐‘œ๐‘Ž๐‘‘ = 1.0๐บ๐‘˜ + 1.0๐‘„๐‘˜ = 1.0 ร— 1150 + 1.0 ร— 350 = 1500๐‘˜๐‘ ๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ž๐‘ข๐‘–๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘‘ ๐‘๐‘Ž๐‘ ๐‘’ ๐‘Ž๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘Ž = 1500 200 = 7.5๐‘š2 โˆดProvide a base of 2.8m square, area = 7.84m2 b) For the Ultimate Limit State ๐‘‘๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘–๐‘”๐‘› ๐‘Ž๐‘ฅ๐‘–๐‘Ž๐‘™ ๐‘™๐‘œ๐‘Ž๐‘‘ = 1.4๐บ๐‘˜ + 1.6๐‘„๐‘˜ = 1.4 ร— 1150 + 1.6 ร— 350 = 2170๐‘˜๐‘ ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก๐‘ข๐‘Ž๐‘™ ๐‘’๐‘Ž๐‘Ÿ๐‘กโ„Ž ๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘ ๐‘ข๐‘Ÿ๐‘’ = 2170 2.82 = 277๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2 Assume a 600mm thick footing ๐‘›๐‘’๐‘ก ๐‘ข๐‘๐‘ค๐‘Ž๐‘Ÿ๐‘‘ ๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘ ๐‘ข๐‘Ÿ๐‘’ = 277 โˆ’ โ„Ž ร— 24 ร— 1.4 = 257๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2 c) Punching Shear Assume the footing is constructed on a blinding layer of 50mm and minimum concrete cover is 50mm ๐‘‘ = 600 โˆ’ 50 โˆ’ 20 โˆ’ 20 2 โ„ = 520๐‘š๐‘š Shear at column face
  • 77. 77 ๐‘ฃ = ๐‘ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘™๐‘ข๐‘š๐‘› ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘–๐‘š๐‘’๐‘ก๐‘’๐‘Ÿ ร— ๐‘‘ = 1500 ร— 103 400 ร— 4 ร— 520 = 1.80๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 ๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘–๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘๐‘Ž๐‘™ ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘–๐‘š๐‘’๐‘ก๐‘’๐‘Ÿ = 4 ร— (400 + 3๐‘‘) = 4 ร— (400 + 3 ร— 520) = 7840๐‘š๐‘š ๐‘Ž๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘Ž ๐‘ค๐‘–๐‘กโ„Ž๐‘–๐‘› ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘–๐‘š๐‘’๐‘ก๐‘’๐‘Ÿ = (400 + 3๐‘‘)2 = (400 + 3 ร— 520)2 = 3841600๐‘š๐‘š2 ๐‘๐‘ข๐‘›๐‘โ„Ž๐‘–๐‘›๐‘” ๐‘ โ„Ž๐‘’๐‘Ž๐‘Ÿ ๐‘“๐‘œ๐‘Ÿ๐‘๐‘’ ๐‘‰ = 257(2.82 โˆ’ 3.84) = 1028๐‘˜๐‘ Punching shear stress v ๐‘ฃ = ๐‘‰ ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ÿ๐‘–๐‘š๐‘’๐‘ก๐‘’๐‘Ÿ ร— ๐‘‘ = 1028 ร— 103 7840 ร— 520 = 0.25๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 The ultimate shear stress is not excessive, therefore h=600mm will be suitable d) Bending reinforcement At the column face which is the critical section 2.8 โˆ’ 0.4 2 = 1.2๐‘š ๐‘€ = (257 ร— 2.8 ร— 1.2) ร— 1.2 2 = 518๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š For concrete ๐‘€ = 0.156๐‘“๐‘๐‘ข๐‘๐‘‘2
  • 78. 78 = 0.156 ร— 25 ร— 2800 ร— 5202 ร— 10โˆ’6 = 2839๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = ๐‘€ 0.87๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ๐‘ง = 518 ร— 106 0.87 ร— 425 ร— 0.95 ร— 520 = 2836๐‘š๐‘š2 Provide 10 Y20bars at 300mm centres (3140mm2) e) Final Check of Punching Shear 100๐ด๐‘  ๐‘๐‘‘ = 100 ร— 3140 2800 ร— 520 = 0.22 From BS 8110, table 3.8, the ultimate shear stress ๐‘ฃ๐‘ = 0.39๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 this is greater than punching shear stress which is ๐‘ฃ = 0.25๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 therefore a base of 600mm deep is adequate Critical section for shear is 1.5d from the column face as shown above Shear ๐‘‰ = 257 ร— 2.8 ร— 0.42 = 302.2๐‘˜๐‘
  • 79. 79 Shear stress ๐‘ฃ = ๐‘‰ ๐‘๐‘‘ = 302.2 ร— 103 2800 ร— 520 = 0.21๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 < 0.39๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 Therefore the section is adequate in shear Combined footings In a case whereby two columns are very close to each other such that the two pad footings designed overlap, a combined footing is necessary. A combined footing is a base that supports two or more columns. These may either be rectangular or trapezoidal. The proportions of the footing ๏‚ท Should not be too long as this will cause larger longitudinal moments on the lengths projecting beyond the columns ๏‚ท Should not be too short as this would cause the span moments in between the columns to be greater hence making the transverse moments to be larger ๏‚ท Thickness should be such that would ensure that shear stresses are not excessive Process of design The principal steps in the design calculations are as follows: 1. Calculate the plan size of the footing using the total load of both columns (for serviceability limit state) and the permissible bearing pressure 2. Calculate the centroid of base 3. Calculate the bearing pressures associated with the critical loading arrangement at the ultimate limit state 4. Assume the thickness h of the footing 5. Check the thickness h for punching shear 6. Determine the reinforcement required to resist bending 7. Make a final check of the punching shear having established the ultimate shear stress precisely 8. Check the shear stress at the critical sections Example A combined footing supports two columns 300mm square and 400mm square with characteristic dead and imposed loads as shown below. The safe bearing pressure is 300kN/m2 and the characteristic material strengths are ๐‘“ ๐‘๐‘ข = 30๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 and ๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ = 460๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2
  • 80. 80 Assume footing self weight = 250kN a) For Serviceability Limit State ๐‘‡๐‘œ๐‘ก๐‘Ž๐‘™ ๐‘™๐‘œ๐‘Ž๐‘‘ = 250 + 1000 + 200 + 1400 + 300 = 3150๐‘˜๐‘ Area of base required ๐ด = ๐‘‡๐‘œ๐‘ก๐‘Ž๐‘™ ๐‘™๐‘œ๐‘Ž๐‘‘ ๐‘ ๐‘Ž๐‘“๐‘’ ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ž๐‘Ÿ๐‘–๐‘›๐‘” ๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘ ๐‘ข๐‘Ÿ๐‘’ = 3150 300 = 10.5๐‘š2 Try 4.6m x 2.3m base ๐‘Ž๐‘๐‘ก๐‘ข๐‘Ž๐‘™ ๐‘Ž๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘Ž = 4.6 ร— 2.3 = 10.58๐‘š2 b) Centroid of footing Load on 300mm column = 1200kN Load on 400mm column = 1700kN Total load = 1200 + 1700 = 2900kN The resultant load will act somewhere in between the columns. Therefore, taking moments about the centerline of 400mm column 3 ร— 1200 = (1700 + 1200) ร— ๐‘ฅฬ… ๐‘ฅฬ… = 3 ร— 1200 (1700 + 1200) = 1.24๐‘š c) Bearing Pressure at the Ultimate Limit State ๐‘‡๐‘œ๐‘ก๐‘Ž๐‘™ ๐ฟ๐‘œ๐‘Ž๐‘‘ = 1.4๐บ๐‘˜ + 1.6๐‘„๐‘˜ = 1.4(1000 + 1400 + 250) + 1.6(200 + 300) = 4510๐‘˜๐‘ ๐ด๐‘๐‘ก๐‘ข๐‘Ž๐‘™ ๐‘’๐‘Ž๐‘Ÿ๐‘กโ„Ž ๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘ ๐‘ข๐‘Ÿ๐‘’ = ๐‘‡๐‘œ๐‘ก๐‘Ž๐‘™ ๐‘™๐‘œ๐‘Ž๐‘‘ ๐ด๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘Ž = 4510 10.58 = 426๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2 Assume footing thickness of 800mm ๐‘›๐‘’๐‘ก ๐‘ข๐‘๐‘ค๐‘Ž๐‘Ÿ๐‘‘ ๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘ ๐‘ข๐‘Ÿ๐‘’ = 426 โˆ’ 1.4 ร— 0.8 ร— 24 = 400๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2
  • 81. 81 d) Moment and Shear Force ๐‘ข๐‘‘๐‘™ = 400 ร— 2.3 = 920๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š Point loads 1. ๐‘Š1 = 1.4 ร— 1000 + 1.6 ร— 200 = 1720๐‘˜๐‘ 2. ๐‘Š2 = 1.4 ร— 1400 + 1.6 ร— 300 = 2440๐‘˜๐‘ The loading, shear force and bending moment diagram are as shown below
  • 82. 82 e) Shear Punching shear cannot be checked since the critical perimeter 1.5h from the column face lies outside the base area. Because the footing is a thick slab with bending in two directions, the critical section for shear is taken as 1.5d from the column face ๐‘‰ = 1509 โˆ’ 400 ร— 2.3(1.5 ร— 0.74 + 0.2) = 304๐‘˜๐‘ Shear stress ๐‘ฃ = ๐‘‰ ๐‘๐‘‘ = 304 ร— 103 2300 ร— 740 = 0.18๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 < 0.8โˆš๐‘“ ๐‘๐‘ข f) Bending reinforcement Longitudinal reinforcement Mid-span of the columns ๐‘€ = 717๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = ๐‘€ 0.87๐‘“๐‘ฆ๐‘ง = 717 ร— 106 0.87 ร— 460 ร— 0.95 ร— 740 = 2549๐‘š๐‘š2 Therefore provide 9Y20 bars (2830mm2) At the face of the 400mm square column ๐‘€ = 400 ร— 2.3 ร— (1.06 โˆ’ 0.2)2 2 = 340๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = ๐‘€ 0.87๐‘“๐‘ฆ๐‘ง = 340 ร— 106 0.87 ร— 460 ร— 0.95 ร— 740 = 1208๐‘š๐‘š2 Minimum area of steel required min ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = 0.13%๐‘โ„Ž = 0.13 100 ร— 2300 ร— 800 = 2392๐‘š๐‘š2 Therefore provide 9Y20 bars โ€“ 270 c/c (2830mm2) Transverse bending ๐‘€ = 400 ร— 1.152 2 = 265๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š
  • 83. 83 Area of steel required ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = ๐‘€ 0.87๐‘“๐‘ฆ๐‘ง = 265 ร— 106 0.87 ร— 460 ร— 0.95 ร— 740 = 942๐‘š๐‘š2 Minimum area of steel required Consider 1m width min ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = 0.13%๐‘โ„Ž = 0.13 100 ร— 1000 ร— 800 = 1040๐‘š๐‘š2 Provide Y16 at 180mm (A=1117mm2) Strip Footing Strip footings are provided to bear the loads transmitted by walls in the case of load bearing walls or where a series of columns are close together.Strip footings are analyzed and designed as inverted continuous beamssubjected to ground bearing pressure. With a thick rigid footing and a firm soil, a linear distribution of bearing pressure is considered. If the columns are equally spaced and equally loaded the pressure is uniformly distributed but if the loading is not symmetrical then the base is subjected to eccentric load and the bearing pressure varies as shown below: The bearing pressure will not be linear when the footing is not very rigid and the soil is soft and compressible. In these cases the bending moment diagram would be quite unlike that for a continuous beam with firmly held supports and the moments could be quite large, particularly if the loading is unsymmetrical. Reinforcement is required in the bottom of the base to resist transverse bending moments in addition to the reinforcement required for the longitudinal bending. Footings which support heavily loaded columns often require stirrups and bent up bars to resist shearing forces.
  • 84. 84 Example Design a strip footing to carry 400mm square columns equally spaced at 3.5m centres. The columns require 16mm dowels and the characteristic loads are 1000kN dead and 350kN imposed. The safe bearing pressure is 200kN/m2 and the characteristic material strengths are fcu=25N/mm2 and fy=460N/mm2. Solution Try footing depthof 700mm. Assume self weight of footing = 40kN/m For Serviceability limit state ๐‘ค๐‘–๐‘‘๐‘กโ„Ž ๐‘œ๐‘“ ๐‘“๐‘œ๐‘œ๐‘ก๐‘–๐‘›๐‘” = ๐‘„ ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ž๐‘Ÿ๐‘–๐‘›๐‘” ๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘ ๐‘ข๐‘Ÿ๐‘’ = 1000 + 350 + (40 ร— 3.5) 200 ร— 3.5 = 2.13๐‘š Provide a strip of 2.2m wide For Ultimate Limit State ๐‘๐‘’๐‘Ž๐‘Ÿ๐‘–๐‘›๐‘” ๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘ ๐‘ข๐‘Ÿ๐‘’ = 1.4(1000 + 40 ร— 3.5) + 1.6 ร— 350 2.2 ร— 3.5 = 280๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2 ๐‘›๐‘’๐‘ก ๐‘ข๐‘๐‘ค๐‘Ž๐‘Ÿ๐‘‘ ๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘ ๐‘ข๐‘Ÿ๐‘’ = 280 โˆ’ 1.4 ร— 0.7 ร— 24 = 257๐‘˜๐‘/๐‘š2 Longitudinal reinforcement Moment at columns (take as interior span where ๐‘€ = ๐น๐‘™ 10 ๐‘€ = 257 ร— 2.2 ร— 3.52 10 = 693๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š Area of steel required ๐‘‘ = ๐‘กโ„Ž๐‘–๐‘๐‘˜๐‘›๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘  ๐‘œ๐‘“ ๐‘ ๐‘™๐‘Ž๐‘(โ„Ž) โˆ’ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘›๐‘๐‘Ÿ๐‘’๐‘ก๐‘’ ๐‘๐‘œ๐‘ฃ๐‘’๐‘Ÿ โˆ’ ๐›ท 2 โ„ = 700 โˆ’ 50 โˆ’ 25 โˆ’ 25 2 โ„ = 612.5๐‘š๐‘š ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = ๐‘€ 0.87๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ๐‘ง = 693 ร— 106 0.87 ร— 460 ร— 0.95 ร— 612.5 = 2976๐‘š๐‘š2 Minimum area of steel required min ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = 0.13%๐‘โ„Ž = 0.13 100 ร— 2200 ร— 700 = 2002๐‘š๐‘š2 Therefore provide Y25B spaced at 150mm centres (3272mm2) In the span where ๐‘€ = ๐น๐‘™ 14 , ๐‘€ = 257 ร— 2.2 ร— 3.52 14 = 495๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š
  • 85. 85 Area of steel required ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = ๐‘€ 0.87๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ๐‘ง = 495 ร— 106 0.87 ร— 460 ร— 0.95 ร— 612.5 = 2126๐‘š๐‘š2 Therefore provide Y20 top bars at 125mm centres (2513mm2) Transverse Reinforcement ๐‘€ = 257 ร— 1.12 2 = 156๐‘˜๐‘๐‘š Area of steel required ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = ๐‘€ 0.87๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ๐‘ง = 156 ร— 106 0.87 ร— 460 ร— 0.95 ร— 612.5 = 670๐‘š๐‘š2 Minimum area of steel required min ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ก = 0.13%๐‘โ„Ž = 0.13 100 ร— 1000 ร— 700 = 910๐‘š๐‘š2 Therefore provide Y16 โ€“ 200 (1005mm2) bottom steel Shear 1.5d from the column face ๐‘‰ = 257 ร— 2.2 ร— (3.5 ร— 0.55 โˆ’ 1.5 ร— 0.6125 โˆ’ 0.2) = 456๐‘˜๐‘ Shear stress ๐‘ฃ = ๐‘‰ ๐‘๐‘‘ = 456 ร— 103 2200 ร— 612.5 = 0.34๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 < 0.35๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 Therefore no shear reinforcement required Raft Foundation A raft foundation is a combined footing which covers the entire area beneath a structure and supports all the walls and columns. This type of foundation is most appropriate and suitable when soil pressure is low or loading is heavy, and the spread footings would cover more than one half of the planned area. This way the raft is able to transmit the load over a wide area. The simplest type of raft is a flat slab of uniform thickness supporting the columns. Where the punching shears are large the columns may be provided with a pedestal at their base. The pedestal serves a similar function to the drop panel in a flat slab floor.Other more heavily loaded rafts require the foundation to be strengthened by beams to forma ribbed construction. The beams may be either downstanding or upstanding. Raft foundations normally rest on soil or rock, or if hard stratum is not available or is deep, it may rest on piles
  • 86. 86 Piled Foundations Piles are used where the soil conditions are poor and it is uneconomical to use spread footings. There are two types of piles 1. Bearing piles โ€“ this is a pile that extends through poor stratum and its tip penetrates a small distance into hard stratum. The load on the pile is supported by the hard stratum 2. Friction pilesโ€“this is a pile which extends through poor stratum and so bears its load bearing capacity in the friction acting on the sides of the piles Concrete piles may be precast and driven into the ground, or they may be the cast in situ type which is bored or excavated. A soil survey has to be carried out in order to determinedepth to firm soil as well as the properties of the soil. This will help find the length of piles required. Group piles can also be used. With these, the minimum spacing of piles should not be less than 1. The pile perimeter โ€“ for friction piles 2. Twice the least width of the pile โ€“ for end bearing piles. Bored piles are sometimes enlarged at their base so that they have a larger bearing area REINFORCED CONCRETE WALLS (SHEAR WALLS) A wall is a vertical load-bearing member whose length exceeds four times its thickness. Types of walls include ๏‚ท Reinforced concrete wall โ€“ this is a wall that has at least the minimum quantity of reinforcement (clause 3.12.5) ๏‚ท Plain concrete wall โ€“ this is a wall that does not have any reinforcement ๏‚ท Braced wall โ€“ this is a wall where reactions to lateral forces are provided by lateral supports such as floors and cross walls ๏‚ท An unbraced wall is a wall providing its own lateral stability such as a cantilever wall ๏‚ท Stocky wall โ€“ this is a wall where the effective height divided by the thickness, ๐‘™๐‘’/โ„Ž does not exceed 15 for a braced wall or 10 for an unbraced wall ๏‚ท Slender wall โ€“ this is a wall other than a stocky wall DESIGN OF REINFORCED CONCRETE WALLS a) Minimum area of vertical reinforcement The minimum amount of reinforcement required for a reinforced concrete wall is 100๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ ๐ด๐‘๐‘ = 0.4 where ๐ด๐‘ ๐‘ is the area of steel in compression and ๐ด๐‘๐‘ is the area of concrete in compression.
  • 87. 87 b) Area of horizontal reinforcement The area of horizontal reinforcement in walls where the vertical reinforcement resists compression and does not exceed 2% is given in cl.3.12.7.4 as ๐‘“๐‘ฆ = 250๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 0.3% of concrete area ๐‘“๐‘ฆ = 460๐‘/๐‘š๐‘š2 0.25% of concrete area c) Links If compression reinforcement exceeds 2%, links must be provided through the wall thickness (clause 3.12.7.5). Minimum links โ€“ 6mm or one-quarter of the largest compression bar General code provisions for design (clause 3.9.3) of reinforced walls 1. Axial Loads Axial loads on walls are calculated by assuming that slabs and beams are simply supported 2. Effective height For a reinforced wall that is constructed monolithically with adjacent construction,๐‘™๐‘’ should be assessed as though the wall were a column subject to bending at right angles to the plane of the wall. 3. Transverse moments These are calculated using elastic analysis for continuous construction. If the construction is simply supported the eccentricity and moment may be assessed using the procedure for a plain wall. The eccentricity is not less than ๐‘ค๐‘Ž๐‘™๐‘™ ๐‘กโ„Ž๐‘–๐‘๐‘˜๐‘›๐‘’๐‘ ๐‘  (โ„Ž) 20 โ„ or 20mm 4. In-plane moments Moments in the plane of single shear wall can be calculated from statics. When several walls resist forces the proportion allocated to each wall should be in proportion to its stiffness Design of stocky reinforced concrete walls (clause 3.9.3.6) a) For stocky braced reinforced walls supporting approximately symmetrical arrangement of slabs(where the spans do not vary by more than 15%), ULS total design load will be ๐‘›๐‘ค = 0.35๐‘“ ๐‘๐‘ข๐ด๐‘ + 0.7๐ด๐‘ ๐‘๐‘“ ๐‘ฆ b) Walls supporting transverse moment and uniform axial load
  • 88. 88 When the only eccentricity of force derives from the transverse moments, the design axial loadmay beassumed to be distributed uniformly along the length of the wall. The cross- section ofthe wall should bedesigned to resist the appropriate design ultimate axial load and transverse moment. The assumptionsmade in the analysis of beam sections apply (see 3.4.4.1). c) Walls resisting in-plane moments and axial forces The cross-section of the wall should be designed to resist the appropriate design ultimate axial load andin-plane moments. d) Walls with axial forces and significant transverse and in-plane moments The effects should be assessed in three stages as follows. i) In-plane. Considering only axial forces and in-plane moments, the distribution of force along the wallis calculated by elastic analysis, assuming no tension in the concrete (see 3.9.3.4). ii) Transverse. The transverse moments are calculated (see 3.9.3.3). iii) Combined. At various points along the wall, effects a) and b) are combined and checked using theassumptions of 3.4.4.1. Design Procedure Design may be done by a) Using an interaction chart b) Assuming a uniform elastic stress distribution c) Assuming that end zones resist moment Elastic stress distribution A straight wall section, including columns if desired, or a channel-shaped wall isanalyzed for axial load and moment using the properties of the gross concrete sectionin each case. The wall is divided into sections and each section is designed for theaverage direct load on it.Compressive forces are resisted by concrete andreinforcement. Tensile stresses are resisted by reinforcement only. Assuming that end zones resist moment Reinforcement located in zones at each end of the wall is designed to resist themoment. The axial load is assumed to be distributed over the length of the wall.
  ็ฟป่ฏ‘๏ผš